Você está na página 1de 105

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 JANUARY 2011

Dear Students,
Find a mentor who can be your role model and your friend !
A mentor is someone you admire and under whom you can study. Throughout
history, the mentor-protege relationship has proven quite fruituful. Socrates was
one of the early mentors. Plato and Aristotle studied under him and later
emerged as great philosophers in their own right.
Some basic rules to know mentors :
The best mentors are successful people in their own field. Their behaviors
are directly translatable to your life and will have more meaning to you.
Be suspicious of any mentors who seek to make you dependent on them. It
is better to have them teach you how to fish than to have them catch the
fish for you. That way, you will remain in control.
Turn your mentors into role models by examining their positive traits.
Write down their virtues. without identifying to whom they belong. When
you are with these mentors, look for even more behavior that reflect their
success. Use these virtues as guidelines for achieving excellence in your
field.
Be cautious while searching for a mentor :
Select people to be your mentors who have the highest ethical standards
and a genuine willingness to help others.
Choose mentors who have and will share superb personal development
habits with you and will encourage you to follow suit.
Incorporate activities into your mentor relationship that will enable your
mentor to introduce you to people of influence or helpfulness.
Insist that your mentor be diligent about monitoring your progress with
accountability functions.
Encourage your mentor to make you an independent, competent, fully
functioning, productive individual. (In other words, give them full
permission to be brutally honest about what you need to change.)
Getting benefited from a role-mode :
Acquiring good habits from others will accelerate you towards achieving your
goals. Ask yourself these questions to get the most out of your role
model/mentors :
What would they do in my situation?
What do they do every day to encourage growth and to move closer to a
goal ?
How do they think in general ? in specific situations ?
Do they have other facts of life in balance ? What effect does that have on
their well-being ?
How do their traits apply to me ?
Which traits are worth working on first ? Later ?
A final word : Under the right circumstances mentors make excellent role
models. The one-to-one setting is highly conducive to learning as well as to
friendship. But the same cautions hold true here as for any role model. It is
better to adapt their philosophies to your life than to adopt them .
Presenting forever positive ideas to your success.

Yours truly


Pramod Maheshwari,
B.Tech., IIT Delhi




































Every effort has been made to avoid errors or
omission in this publication. In spite of this,
errors are possible. Any mistake, error or
discrepancy noted may be brought to our
notice which shall be taken care of in the
forthcoming edition, hence any suggestion is
welcome. It is notified that neither the
publisher nor the author or seller will be
responsible for any damage or loss of action to
any one, of any kind, in any manner, there from.
No Portion of the magazine can be
published/ reproduced without the
written permission of the publisher
All disputes are subject to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the Kota
Courts only.
Owned & Published by Pramod
Maheshwari, 112, Shakti Nagar,
Dadabari, Kota & Printed by Naval
Maheshwari, Published & Printed at 112,
Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.

Editor : Pramod Maheshwari
"Faliure is Success if we learn from it"
Volume - 6 Issue - 7
January, 2011 (Monthly Magazine)
Editorial / Mailing Office :
112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.)
Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000
e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com
Editor :
Pramod Maheshwari
[B.Tech. IIT-Delhi]
Cover Design
Om Gocher, Govind Saini

Layout
Rajaram Gocher
Circulation & Advertisement
Praveen Chandna
Ph 0744-3040000, 9672977502
Subscription
Sudha Jaisingh Ph. 0744-2500492, 2500692
Strictly reserved with the publishers
Editorial
Unit Price ` 20/-
Special Subscription Rates
6 issues : ` 100 /- [One issue free ]
12 issues : ` 200 /- [Two issues free]
24 issues : ` 400 /- [Four issues free]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 2 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 3 JANUARY 2011



Volume-6 Issue-7
January, 2011 (Monthly Magazine)



NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS

Much more IIT-JEE News.
Know IIT-JEE With 15 Best Questions of IIT-JEE
Challenging Problems in Physics,, Chemistry & Maths
Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy for IIT-JEE.
Xtra Edge Test Series for JEE- 2011 & 2012
Mock Test Paper CBSE Class XII





S

Success Tips for the Months

The greatest adventure is what lies ahead.
Fixers believe they can fix. Complainers
believe they can complain. They are both
right.
The tire model for motivation: People
work best at the right pressure.
Trust the force, Luke.
Use your feelings or your feelings will use
you.
People who expect to fail are usually right.
The path to success is paved with mistakes.
You've got to cross that lonesome valley.
You've got to cross it by yourself.
Appreciate what your brain does. In case
nobody else does.
Learn to mock the woe-mongers.
Be confident. Even if you are not, pretend
to be. No one can tell the difference.

CONTENTS
INDEX PAGE




NEWS ARTICLE 4
The young innovator from IIT Kharagpur bagged
first prize at IIT-Delhi fair
Engineering better managers

IITian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 6
Dr. Raghuram G. Rajan & Prof. Devang Khakhar

KNOW IIT-JEE 7
Previous IIT-JEE Question

























XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 60
Class XII IIT-JEE 2011 Paper
Class XI IIT-JEE 2012 Paper
Mock Test-2 (CBSE Board Pattern) [Class # XII] 78
Solution of Mock Test-1 (CBSE Pattern)

Regulars ..........


DYNAMIC PHYSICS 16

8-Challenging Problems [Set# 9]
Students Forum
Physics Fundamentals
Prism & Wave nature of Light
Waves & Dopspler Effect

CATALYSE CHEMISTRY 33

Key Concept
Carbohydrates
Salt Analysis
Understanding : Organic Chemistry

DICEY MATHS 43
Mathematical Challenges
Students Forum
Key Concept
Differential Equations
Trigonomatrical Ratios

Study Time........
Test Time ..........
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 4 JANUARY 2011

The young innovator from IIT
Kharagpur bagged first prize At
IIT-Delhi fair
Indian Institutes of Technology (IITs)
have always encouraged innovation
and entrepreneurship. Shwetank Jain,
studying BTech at IIT Kharagpur
proved it by winning the first prize at
the India Innovation Initiative (i3)
National Fair by presenting his P2
Power Solutions an Intelligent
Power Conditioner with Hybrid
System Integrator that economizes use
of energy and enhances power quality.
The fair was held at IIT Delhi and was
organized by the Department of
Science and Technology, Government
of India, Agilent Technologies, and
the Confederation of Indian Industry
(CII).

Engineering better managers

The faculty and the curriculum at
DMS were excellent. Some of our
courses were introduced only much
later in other B-schools in the country.
It was a fantastic experience, says
Saurav Sharma, alumni of IIT Delhis
Department of Management Studies
(DMS).
Sharma, now a director at United
Bank of Switzerland and based in
Hyderabad, is from the Class of 1997.
DMS began functioning as a separate
department from that year, though
post-graduate management education
was introduced in IIT Delhi in 1976.
Housed within the IIT Delhi campus, the
institute offers, MBA (full time) with
focus on management systems, MBA
(full time) with focus on
telecommunications system management
and MBA (part-time) with focus on
technology management. Apart from
these, students can opt for specialisation
in functional areas like finance,
marketing, information technology and
human resource. All IITs admit
students to the two-year full time MBA
programme through the Joint
Management Entrance Test.
The faculty, infrastructure and courses
offered here are unparalleled. Systems
thinking and creative problem solving
are two courses that are excellent and
not taught in any other B-school, says
Tajinder Kohli, a first-year MBA
student.
P.K. Jain, who teaches finance, with 35
years of teaching experience and 23
books and 120 research papers in
national and international journals to
his credit, is widely rated as one of the
best teachers in India in his field. Our
objective is to turn a good engineer into
a better engineer. We encourage
students to do field work to increase
their awareness of the real world work
conditions, says Vinayshil Gautam,
who was the first head of the
department of DMS and the founder
director of IIM-Khozhikode.
Another reason why DMS is so sought
after by students is the placements that
they are offered. The return on
investment is really high and the brand
name of IIT definitely helps. Including
the hostel charges, one has to pay
around Rs 2 lakh for the course. The
minimum salary offered to graduates
who pass out from here is at three times
as much. In comparison, other
comparable institutes charge 2-4 times
these fees, says Vipul Arora, a second
year student and a member of the
placement committee.We find the
students of IIT-DMS very
impressive. What we look for in our
organisation is a combination of
management skills, presentablity and
communication skills, said Vinay
Tiwari, Campus Relations Manager,
Citigroup. The students here
embody all these qualities.
The green campus and the canteens
act as great value additions.I love
the greenery in the campus and its
great to walk around. The Uth Caf
is the most popular hangout here.
From Indian to Italian, it offers all
kinds of dishes and it remains abuzz
till the wee hours of morning.
Politics, studies, films we discuss
everything over cups of chai and
coffee, says Kavita Dara, a first year
MBA student. Parivartan, the annual
management festival and the
magazine CHAOS (Creative and
Holistic Approach to Organisational
Systems) are among the various
other platforms offered to students to
nurture their creative spirits

IITs to assist, collaborate with
other technical institutions
Bangalore: The Institutes of
Technology Act, that is around forty
years old, is being amended soon to
allow the Indian Institutes of
Technology (IITs) to take up the
responsibility of supporting and
collaborating with other technical
education institutions and also to
advise the state governments on
technological problems within the
zone where the IIT exists.
The Institutes of Technology
(Amendments) Bill, 2010 will make
it mandatory for all 15 IITs in the
country to provide training, facilitate
study visits, share laboratories as
well as other resources with
othertechnical institutions in their
respective zones.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 5 JANUARY 2011
This will allow technical institutes,
that have been mushrooming all over
the country but have often been
criticized for poor standards, to
collaborate with the IITs and better
their educational system.
The bill has been given the go ahead
by the Council of IITs. However, the
parliamentary standing committee on
human resource development has
recommended that the clauses that
make it compulsory for all IITs to
collaborate with other technical
institutions should not me made
mandatory.
The parliamentary standing committee
includes members such as Rahul
Gandhi, Kanimozhi and Suresh
Kalmadi. The committee had
submitted a report last month
regarding the proposed bill in which it
had been stated that the issues of
resources, capacity and faculty at the
IITs must be addressed first.
The report also said that the technical
educational institutions must also have
the vision to support and deal with the
demands of the society as well as the
industry.
The standing committee was headed
by Oscar Fernandes and had relied
heavily on the reservations of the
finance ministry that had emphasized
that the new clauses that were in the
Institutes of Technology
(Amendments) Bill were casting an
obligation upon the IITs to meet the
technological needs of the states
where they were situated.
Innovators showcase designs at
IIT Delhi fair
New Delhi: The India Innovation
Initiative (i3) National Fair held at the
Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi
(IIT-D) showcased scientific
innovations and inventions by several
students from all over India.
The fair was organized in association
with Agilent Technologies, Department
of Science and Technology of the
government of India and the
Confederation of the Indian Industry.
The first prize at the fair was won by
Shwetank Jain, a 25 year old, whose
project while pursuing B.Tech at IIT
Kharagpur helped him to gain
entrepreneurial success. Jain's project
was an Intelligent Power Conditioner
with Hybrid System Integrator.
Brainchild of Jain and his friends, the
project called the P2 Power Solutions
had the aim to provide innovative
engineering solutions while focusing
specifically on energy efficiency and
power quality enhancement. The
second prize at the fair was won by
Nandan Kumar, Sudarshan Rajagopal
and Sankamesh Ramaswamy for
developing an automated machine that
manufactures three-dimensional non-
woven fibrous structures that have
application in the medical field.
Kumar, a textile engineer, informed
that the cotton used in medical
applications have short fibers that may
be transferred to the surface of the
wound and cause infection. "The fibers
that we have created are hollow from
inside and provide more space to
absorb bodily fluids," he said.
Over 50 innovators showcased their
creations at the fair. They had been
chosen from around 1000 entries from
all over the country.
Shourie: allow IITs to work
autonomously
The former Union Minister, Arun
Shourie, said on Saturday that academic
institutions of excellence such as the
Indian Institutes of Technology should
be left to work autonomously without
government interference.
He was speaking at the Dr. Homi
Bhabha Centenary Conclave, a three-
day event that began at the Tata
Institute of Fundamental Research
(TIFR) here on Friday. The conclave
brought together former recipients of
the Homi Bhabha Fellowship. Mr.
Shourie himself was a recipient.
Mr. Shourie said the TIFR, an
institution of excellence, thrived
because of its autonomy. Mr. J.R.D.
Tata entrusted Dr. Bhabha, and so did
Pandit Nehru, with the job of setting up
an institution of learning and research
of the calibre of the TIFR.
He said Dr. Bhabhas approach was of
unobtrusive oversight. Contrasting
the TIFR with the institutions of today,
Mr. Shourie said they suffered because
they were unduly besieged by the
government. Nine new IITs were
announced despite a teacher
shortage, he said. IIT-Rajasthan
was announced two-and-a-half years
ago. The head of the institute was
appointed two years later. Still, the
site for the institute was not decided.
The Chief Minister wants it in his
constituency, while his predecessor
wanted it in hers. Therefore, it was
decided that the IIT-Kanpur would
house it, thereby burdening the
parent institute.
IIT Rajasthan PhD Programme
Admission December 2010
Indian Institute of Technology (IIT),
Rajasthan, has invited applications
for admission into Doctorate of
Philosophy (PhD) programme, to be
offered in the academic session
commencing from December 2010.
Indian Institute of Technology (IIT)
Rajasthan is one of the prestigious
IITs of India. The initiative of
establishing the institute was taken
by Ministry of Human Resource
Development (MHRD), Government
of India, in 2008.
IIT students refraining from
signing bonds with recruiters
IIT-Madras academic affairs
secretary said that most candidates
these days were not willing to sign
any bonds. "We have informed the
recruiters that they would be required
to incentivize students to make them
work for them," he said.
At IIT-Bombay, companies that had
insisted on students signing contracts
with them had been politely declined
from participating in the recruitment
procedure.
IIT Joint Admission Test for
M.Sc on May 8, 2011
New Delhi: The Joint Admission
Test for M.Sc (JAM) for pursuing
post-graduation at the Indian
Institutes of Technology (IIT) will be
conducted on May 8, 2011 at various
test centres in the Bombay, Delhi,
Guwahati, Kanpur, Kharagpur,
Madras and Roorkee Zones.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 6 JANUARY 2011

































Dr. Raghuram G. Rajan received his Bachelors degree in
Electrical Engineering from IIT Delhi in 1985 along with
the Directors Gold Medal for all round performance. He
graduated from I.I.M. Ahmedabad in 1987, where he
received a gold medal for academic performance.
He joined the Graduate School of Business (GSB),
University of Chicago in 1991 after obtaining a Ph.D. from
MIT. In 1994, Dr. Rajan received tenure and appointment
as Professor of Finance and is now the Joseph L. Gidwitz
Distinguished Service Professor of Finance at the GSB. He
has held a visiting chair at Northwestern (1996-97) and the
Fischer Black visiting chair at M.I.T. (2000-2001).
Dr. Rajan is currently the Economic Counselor and
Director of Research at the International Monetary Fund,
USA. He has been on this position since 2003.
Dr. Rajans research interests focus primarily on economic
institutions ranging from banks to property rights. He
teaches courses on Corporate Finance and Banking at the
GSB. His papers have been published in all the top
economics and finance journals. He has also written a
book with Luigi Zingales entitled Saving Capitalism from
the Capitalists, which was published by Random House in
February 2003.
Dr. Rajan is a Director of the American Finance
Association and the Program Director for the Corporate
Finance Program at the National Bureau of Economic
Research. He has served as a consultant to a number of
organizations including the World Bank, the Federal
Reserve Board, the Reserve Bank of India, the Swedish
Parliament, finance companies and banks.
In honouring Dr. Raghuram Rajan, IIT Delhi recognizes
the outstanding contributions made by him as a
Researcher, Educator and Financial Economist. Through
his achievements, Dr. Raghuram G. Rajan has brought
glory to the name of this Institute.

Prof. Devang Khakhar received his Bachelors Degree in
Chemical Engineering from IIT Delhi in 1981. He
subsequently received his Ph.D. in Chemical Engineering
from the University of Massachusetts, Amherst in 1986.
Prof. Khakhar is presently Professor of Chemical
Engineering and Dean of Faculty at IIT Bombay.
After spending one semester at IIT Kanpur as a Visiting
Faculty Member, Prof. Khakhar joined IIT Bombay in
January 1987 as a Lecturer. He became a Professor at IIT
Bombay in 1996. He was also a Visiting Faculty Member
at Northwestern University in 1996. Prof. Khakhar served
as the Head of Chemical Engineering from 2002 to 2004
and became Dean of Faculty in 2005.
Prof. Khakhar has made pioneering research contributions
in a number of areas of Chemical Engineering including
polymers, granular mechanics and mixing. The work has
been published in top international journals such as Nature
and Science. Some of the work has had a direct impact on
industrial practice. Prof. Khakhar teaches courses related
to fluid mechanics, granular mechanics and polymers.
Prof. Khakhar has received several awards and
recognitions for his work. He is a Fellow of the Indian
Academic of Science, Bangalore, the Indian National
Science Academy, New Delhi and the Indian National
Academy of Engineering. He is a recipient of the Shanti
Swarup Bhatnagar Prize, the Swarnajayanti Fellowship
and the Excellence in Teaching Award of IIT Bombay.
Prof. Khakhar is currently a member of the governing
council of the Indian National Academy of Engineering
and a member of the Science and Engineering Research
Council of the Department of Science and Technology,
India.
In honouring Prof. Devang Khakhar, IIT Delhi recognizes
the outstanding contributions made by him as a
Researcher, Scientist and Educator. Through his
achievements, Prof. Devang Khakhar has brought glory to
the name of the Institute.

Success Story
Success Story
This article contains stories/interviews of persons who succeed after graduation from different IITs
Dr. Raghuram G. Rajan
Electrical Engineering from
IIT Delhi in 1985
Ph.D. from MIT. In 1994
Prof. Devang Khakhar
BTech from IIT- Delhi in 1981,
Ph.D. in Chemical Engineering from
the University of Massachusetts, in
1986.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 7 JANUARY 2011
















PHYSICS


1. A uniform wire having mass per unit length is placed
over a liquid surface. The wire causes the liquid to
depress by y(y << a) as shown in figure. Find surface
tension of liquid. Neglect end effect. [IIT-2004]

y
a a

Sol. The free body diagram of wire is given below. If l is
the length of wire, then for equilibrium 2F S sin
= W.

F F
mg


F = S l 2S l Sin = l g
or S =

sin 2
g

also sin = y/a
S =
a y
g
/ 2

=
y
g a
2


Surface tension, S =
y
g a
2
+



2. A double-pane window used for insulating a room
thermally from outside consists of two glass sheets
each of area 1 m
2
and thickness 0.01 m separated by a
0.05 m thick stagnant air space. In the steady state, the
room glass inter-face and the glass-outdoor interface
are at constant temperatures of 27C and 0C
respectively. Calculate the rate of heat flow through the
window pane. Also find the temperatures of other
interfaces. Given thermal conductivities of glass and air
as 0.8 and 0.08 W m
1
K
1
respectively. [IIT-1997]

Sol.

I
K1
II
K2
III
K3
H
H
1 2
d3
d2 d1
B
A
A > B

At steady state
First material : H =
1
1
d
K
A (
A

1
) ...(i)
Second material : H =
2
2
d
K
A (
1

2
) ...(ii)
Third material : H =
3
3
d
K
A (
2

B
) ...(iii)
From (i)
A

1
=
A
H
1
1
K
d
...(iv)
From (ii)
1

2
=
A
H
2
2
K
d
...(v)
From (iii)
2

B
=
A
H
3
3
K
d
...(vi)
Adding the above three equations we get

A

B
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ +
3
3
2
2
1
1
K
d
K
d
K
d
A
H

H =
3
3
2
2
1
1
) (
K
d
K
d
K
d
A
B A
+ +


Substituting the values
H =
8 . 0
01 . 0
08 . 0
05 . 0
8 . 0
01 . 0
1 ) 0 27 (
+ +
= 41.54 J/s
From (iv)
27
1
=
1
54 . 41

8 . 0
01 . 0

1
= 26.48
From (vi)
2
0 =
1
54 . 41

8 . 0
01 . 0

2
= 0.52C

3. Two long straight parallel wires are 2 metres part,
perpendicular to the plane of the paper (see figure). The
wire A carries a current of 9.6 amps, directed into the
plane of the paper. The wire B carries a current such
that the magnetic field of induction at the point P, at a
distance of
11
10
metre from the wire B, is zero.
KNOW IIT-JEE
By Previous Exam Questions
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 8 JANUARY 2011

O

1.6 m
2

m
1.2m
10/11 m
P
S
A
B

Find :
(i) The magnitude and direction of the current in B
(ii) The magnitude of the magnetic field of induction
at the point S.
(iii) The force per unit length on the wire B.
[IIT-1987]
Sol. (i) The magnetic field at P due to current in wire A
B
A
=
4

0
AP
r
lA 2
=

4
0

|
.
|

\
|
+

11
10
2
6 . 9 2
...(i)
(Direction P to M)
The current in wire B should be in upward direction
so as to cancel the magnetic field due to A at P. (By
right hand Thumb rule)
The magnetic field at P due to current in wire B

1.6 m
2

m
1.2m
B
S
A

M
B
A

B
B

N
10/11m

B
B
=

4
0

|
.
|

\
|
11
10
2
B
l
...(ii)
From (i) and (ii)

4
0

|
.
|

\
|
+

11
10
2
6 . 9 2
=

4
0

|
.
|

\
|
11
10
2
B
l


32
11 6 . 9
=
10
11
B
I

I
B
=
32
96
= 3A

(ii) The dimensions given shows that
SA
2
+ SB
2
= AB
2

ASB = 90
Magnetic field due to A at S
B
SA
=

4
0
.
SA
A
r
I 2
=

4
0

6 . 1
6 . 9 2

(Directed S to B)
Magnetic field due to B at S
B
SA
=

4
0
.
SB
B
r
I 2
=

4
0
2 . 1
3 2

(Directed S to A)
The resultant magnetic field
B =
2 2
SB SA
B B + =

4
0
2 2
6 . 0
3
8 . 0
6 . 9
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|

= 10
7
13 = 1.3 10
6
T


(iii) Force per unit length on wire
B =

4
0
AB
B A
r
I I 2

=
2
3 6 . 9 2 10
7

= 28.8 10
7
N
This force will be repulsive nature.

4. In Figure S is a monochromatic point source emitting
light of wavelength = 500 nm. A thin lens of circular
shape and focal length 0.10 m is cut into two identical
haves L
1
and L
2
by a plane passing through a diameter.
The two halves are placed symmetrically about the
central axis SO with a gap of 0.5 m . The distance
along the axis from S to L
1
and L
2
is 0.15 m while that
from L
1
and L
2
to O is 1.30 m. The screen at O is
normal to SO.

O
A 0.5 mm
Screen
1.30 m
0.15 m
L2
L1
S

(i) If the third intensity maximum occurs at the point
A on the screen, find the distance OA.
(ii) If the gap between L
1
and L
2
is reduced from its
original value of 0.5 mm, will the distance OA
increase, decrease, or remain the same?
[IIT1993]
Sol. (i) In this case, the two identical halves of convex
lens will create two seperate images S
1
and S
2
of the
source S. These Images (S
1
and S
2
) will behave as
two coherant sources and the further dealing will be
in accordance to Young's double slit experiment.
For lens L
1

The object is S
u = 0.15 m

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 9 JANUARY 2011

u
L2
L1
V
S1
S2
d
O
A
D
1.3m
0.15m
S
O1
O2
0.3m


v = ?
f = + 0.1 ,

v
1

u
1
=
f
1


v
1
=
f
1
+
u
1
=
1 . 0
1
+
15 . 0
1


v
1
=
15 . 0 1 . 0
1 . 0 15 . 0

=
15 . 0 1 . 0
05 . 0


v =
05 . 0
15 . 0 1 . 0
= 0.3 m
SO
1
O
2
and SS
1
S
2
are similar. Also the placement
of O
1
and O
2
are symmetrical to S

2 1
2 1
O O
S S
=
u
v u +

S
1
S
2
=
( )
u
) O O ( v u
2 1
+
=
( )
15 . 0
3 . 0 15 . 0 +
0.5 10
3

S
1
S
2
= d = 1.5 10
3
m
D = 1.3 0.3 = 1 m
The fringe width
=
d
D
=
3
9
10 5 . 1
1 10 500


=
3
1
10
3

Therefore,
OA = 3 = 3
3
1
10 m = 10
3
m
(ii) If the gap between L
1
and L
2
i.e., O
1
O
2
is
reduced. then d will be reduced. Then the fringe
width with increase and hence OA will increase.

5. A hydrogen-like atom (described by the Bohr model) is
observed to emit six wavelengths, originating from all
possible transitions between a group of levels. These
levels have energies between 0.85 eV and 0.544 eV
(including both these values).
(a) Find the atomic number of the atom.
(b) Calculate the smallest wavelength emitted in
these transitions.
(Take hc = 1240 eV-nm, ground state energy of
hydrogen atom = 13.6 eV) [IIT-2002]
Sol. If x is the difference in quantum number of the states
then
x+1
C
2
= 6 x = 3

Smallest
n
n +3

Now, we have
2
2
n
) eV 6 . 13 ( Z
= 0.85 eV ...(i)
and
2
2
) 3 n (
) eV 6 . 13 ( Z
+
= 0.544 eV ...(ii)
Solving (i) and (ii) we get n = 12 and Z = 3
(b) Smallest wavelength is given by

hc
= (0.85 0.544) eV
Solving, we get 4052 nm.

CHEMISTRY


6. An ideal gas having initial pressure P, volume V and
temperature T is allowed to expand adiabatically until
its volume becomes 5.66 V, while its temperature
falls to T/2.
(a) How many degrees of freedom do the gas
molecules have ?
(b) Obtain the work done by the gas during the
expansion as a function of the initial pressure P
and volume V. [IIT-1990]
Sol. (a) According to adiabatic gas equation,
TV
1
= constant
or T
1
V
1
1
= T
2
V
2
1

Here, T
1
= T ; T
2
= T/2
V
1
= V
and V
2
= 5.66 V
Hence, TV
1
=
2
T
(5.66V)
1

=
2
T
(5.66)
1
V
1
or (5.66)
1
= 2 ..(1)
Taking log,
( 1)log 5.66 = log 2
or 1 =
66 . 5 log
2 log
=
7528 . 0
3010 . 0
= 0.4
or = 1.4
If f, be the number of degrees of freedom, then
= 1 +
f
2
or 1.4 = 1 +
f
2

or
f
2
= 1.4 1 = 0.4
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 10 JANUARY 2011
or f =
4 . 0
2
= 5
(b) According to adiabatic gas equation,
P
1
V
1

= P
2
V
2


Here, P
1
= P
V
1
= V
V
2
= 5.66 V
Hence, PV

= P
2
(5.66V)

= P
2
(5.66)

V


or P
2
=

) 66 . 5 (
P
=
4 . 1
) 66 . 5 (
P
=
32 . 11
P
[using eq.(1)]
Hence, work done by the gas during adiabatic
expansion
=
1
2 2 1 1

V P V P
=
1 4 . 1
66 . 5
32 . 11
V
P
PV

=
4 . 0
2
PV
PV
=
4 . 0 2
PV
= 1.25 PV

7. (a) Write the chemical reaction associated with the
"brown ring test".
(b) Draw the structures of [Co(NH
3
)
6
]
3+
, [Ni(CN)
4
]
2
and [Ni(CO)
4
]. Write the hybridization of atomic
orbital of the transition metal in each case.
(c) An aqueous blue coloured solution of a transition
metal sulphate reacts with H
2
S in acidic medium to
give a black precipitate A, which is insoluble in warm
aqueous solution of KOH. The blue solution on
treatment with KI in weakly acidic medium, turns
yellow and produces a white precipitate B. Identify
the transition metal ion. Write the chemical reaction
involved in the formation of A and B. [IIT-2000]
Sol. (a) NaNO
3
+ H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HNO
3

2HNO
3
+ 6FeSO
4
+ 3H
2
SO
4

3Fe
2
(SO
4
)
3
+ 2NO + 4H
2
O
[Fe(H
2
O)
6
]SO
4
.H
2
O + NO
Ferrous Sulphate
[Fe(H
2
O)
5
NO] SO
4
+ 2H
2
O
(Brown ring)
(b) In [Co(NH
3
)
6
]
3+
cobalt is present as Co
3+
and its
coordination number is six.
Co
27
= 1s
1
, 2s
2
2p
6
, 3s
2
3p
6
3d
7
, 4s
2

Co
3+
ion = 1s
2
, 2s
2
2p
6
, 3s
2
3p
6
3d
6


3d 4s 4p
3d 4s 4p
d
2
sp
3
hybridization
Hence
Co
3+
ion in
Complex ion



3+
Co
NH
3
NH
3
NH
3
H
3
N
H
3
N NH
3
or
H
3
N

H
3
N

NH
3
NH
3
NH
3
NH
3
Co
3+


In [Ni(CN)
4
2
nickel is present as Ni
2+
ion and its
coordination numbers is four
Ni
28
=1s
2
, 2s
2
2p
6
, 3s
2
3p
6
3d
8
, 4s
2

Ni
2+
ion = 1s
2
, 2s
2
2p
6
, 3s
2
3p
6
3d
8



3d 4s
4p
3d 4s
4p
dsp
2
hybridization
Ni
2+
ion =
Ni
2+
ion in
Complex ion

Hence structure of [Ni(CN)
4
]
2
is

Ni
2+
N C

N C

C N

C N


In [Ni(CO)
4
, nickel is present as Ni atom i.e. its
oxidation number is zero and coordination number is
four.

3d 4s 4p
sp
3
hybridization
Ni in
Complex

Its structure is as follows :


Ni
CO
CO
CO
OC

(c) The transition metal is Cu
2+
. The compound is
CuSO
4
.5H
2
O
CuSO
4
+ H
2
S
medium Acidic

ppt Black
CuS + H
2
SO
4

2CuSO
4
+ 4KI Cu
2
I
2
+ I
2
+ 2K
2
SO
4

(B) white
I
2
+ I

I
3

(yellow solution)

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 11 JANUARY 2011
8. An organic compound A, C
6
H
10
O on reaction with
CH
3
MgBr followed by acid treatment gives
compound B. The compound B on ozonolysis gives
compound C, which in presence of a base gives 1-
acetyl cyclopentene D. The compound B on reaction
with HBr gives compound E. Write the structures of
A, B, C and E. Show how D is formed from C.
[IIT-2000]
Sol. The given reaction can be summarised as below :

[A]
C
6
H
10
O
(i) CH
3
MgBr
(ii) H
+
O
3
[B]
OH

[C]
COCH
3
HBr
[E]
[D]
Conclusions from the set of reactions
(i) Carbon-hydrogen ratio of [A] indicates that it is
cyclic compound
(ii) Reaction of [A] with CH
3
MgBr indicates that it
should have a ketonic group.
(iii) As [B] undergoes ozonolysis to form [C], It must
have a double bond, and [C] must have two carbonyl
groups.
(iv) Reaction of [C] a dicarbonyl compound) with a
base gives a cyclic compound, it indicates that
intramolecular condensation have occurred during
this conversion. Thus [A] is cyclohexanone which
explains all the given reactions.

(A)
(i) CH
3
MgBr
(ii) H
+
O
3
OH

[C]
CHO

O CH
3
(B)
O




H
2
O HBr
Br
COCH
3
OH

COCH
3
; B
H
3
C
(D) (E)

9. A small quantity of solution containing
24
Na radio-
nuclide (half life 15 hours) of activity 1.0 micro-curie
is injected into the blood of a person. A sample of the
blood of volume 1 cm
3
taken after 5 hours shows an
activity of 296 disintegrations per minute. Determine
the total volume of blood in the body of the person.
Assume that the radioactive solution mixes uniformly
in the blood of the person. (1 curie = 3.7 10
10

disintegrations per second). [IIT-1994]
Sol. Given that,
t
1/2
= 15 hours = 15 3600 s

dt
dN
= 1 micro-curie
= 1 10
6
3.7 10
10
disintegrations s
1

= 3.7 10
4
disintegrations s
1


dt
dN
= 296 disintegrations min
1

=
60
296
disintegrations s
1

t = 5 hours = 5 3600 s
Now, t
1/2
=

693 . 0

or =
2 / 1
693 . 0
t
=
3600 15
693 . 0

s
1

= 1.283 10
5
s
1

and,
dt
dN
= N
0

or 3.7 10
4
= 1.283 10
5
N
0

or N
0
=
5
4
10 283 . 1
10 7 . 3

= 2.884 10
9

After 5 hours,
N = N
0
e
t

= 2.884 10
9

3600 5 10 283 . 1
5
e


= 2.884 10
9
e
0.23
= 2.289 10
9

Again,
dt
dN
= N
0

or
60
296
= 1.283 10
5
N
0

or N
0
=
5
10 238 . 1 60
296


= 3.845 10
5

If total volume of blood in the body be V, then

N
N
0

=
V
1

or V =
0
N
N
=
5
9
10 845 . 3
10 289 . 2

cm
3

= 5953 cm
3
= 5.953 litres

10. An organic compound (A), C
6
H
6
O, gives a specific
colour with FeCl
3
solution and on heating with
phthalic anhydride and conc. H
2
SO
4
gives a white
solid (B) which gives red colour with dilute NaOH
(C). Compound (A) on heating with CCl
4
and NaOH
gives (D), which on acidification gives (E).
Compound (E) gives violet colour with FeCl
3
. (E) on
heating with (A) in presence of POCl
3
gives (F),
which is used as intestinal antiseptic. What are (A) to
(F) ? Explain giving balanced equations.
Sol. (i) As it gives colour with FeCl
3
, hence it is phenol.
(ii) On heating with phthalic anhydride it gives
phenolphthalein (B) which gives red colour of
sodium salt of (B), i.e(C).
(iii) (A) undergoes Reimer-Tieman reaction with
CCl
4
and NaOH giving disodium salt (D), which on
acidification gives (E) salicylic acid because violet
colour is given by salicylic acid.
(iv) (E) on heating with phenol (A) gives salol (F)
which is used as an intestinal antiseptic.
Reactions :

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 12 JANUARY 2011

C O
HO
OH
H H
O
C
O
H
2
SO
4
; H
2
O


C O
HO OH
C
O
2NaOH

C
NaO
O
COO

Na
+


OH
+ CCl
4
+ 6NaOH

(A)
ONa
(D)
COONa
2HCl
2NaCl
OH
(E)
COOH
(A) C6H5OH
POCl3/; H2O
OH
(F)
COOC
6
H
5


MATHEMATICS


11. Sixteen players S
1
, S
2
, ... , S
16
play in a tournament.
They are divided into eight pairs at random from each
pair a winner is decided on the basis of a game played
between the two players of the pair. Assume that all the
players are of equal strength.
(a) Find the probability that the players S
1
is among
the eight winners.
(b) Find the probability that exactly one of the two
players S
1
and S
2
is among the eight winners.
[IIT-1997]
Sol. (a) Probability of S
1
to be among the eight winners
= (Probability of S
1
being a pair) (Probability
of S
1
winning in the group).
= 1
2
1
=
2
1
{Q S
1
is definitely in a
group}
(b) If S
1
and S
2
are in the same pair then exactly one
wins.
If S
1
and S
2
are in two pairs separately then exactly
one of S
1
and S
2
will be among the eight winners. If
S
1
wins and S
2
loses or S
1
loses and S
2
wins.
Now the probability of S
1
, S
2
being in the same pair
and one wins.
= (Probability of S
1
, S
2
being the same pair)
(Probability of anyone winning in the pair).
And the probability of S
1
, S
2
being the same pair
=
) (
) (
S n
E n

Where n(E) = the number of ways in which 16
persons can be divided in 8 pairs.
n(E) =
! 7 . ) ! 2 (
)! 14 (
7
and n(S) =
! 8 . ) ! 2 (
)! 16 (
8

Probability of S
1
and S
2
being in the same pair
=
)! 16 !.( 7 . ) ! 2 (
! 8 . ) ! 2 )!.( 14 (
7
8
=
15
1

The probability of any one wining in the pairs of S
1
,
S
2
= P (certain event) = 1
The pairs of S
1
, S
2
being in two pairs sparately
and S
1
wins, S
2
loses + The probability of S
1
, S
2

being in two pairs separately and S
1
loses, S
2

wins.
=

! 8 . ) ! 2 (
)! 16 (
! 7 . ) ! 2 (
)! 14 (
1
8
7

2
1

2
1
+

! 8 . ) ! 2 (
)! 16 (
! 7 . ) ! 2 (
)! 14 (
1
8
7

2
1

2
1

=
2
1

)! 14 ( 15
)! 14 ( 14

=
15
7

Required Probability =
15
1
+
15
7
=
15
8


12. Find the range of values of t for which
2sin t =
1 2 3
5 2 1
2
2
x x
x x +
, t
(


2
,
2
. [IIT-2005]

Sol. Here, 2 sin t =
1 2 3
5 2 1
2
2
x x
x x +
, t
(


2
,
2

Put, 2sin t = y 2 y 2
y =
1 2 3
5 2 1
2
2
x x
x x +

(3y 5)x
2
2x(y 1) ( y + 1) = 0
Since x R {1, 1/3} {as, 3x
2
2x 1 0}
D 0
4(y 1)
2
+ 4(3y 5) (y +1) 0
y
2
y 1 0

2
2
1
|
.
|

\
|
y
4
5
0
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 13 JANUARY 2011

|
|
.
|

\
|
2
5

2
1
y
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
5
2
1
y 0
y
2
5 1
or y
2
5 1+

or 2sin t
2
5 1
or 2sin t
2
5 1+

sin t |
.
|

\
|
10

sin or sin t |
.
|

\
|
10
3
sin
t
10

or t
10
3

Thus, Range for t
(


10
,
2

(


2
,
10
3


13. If f (x) is twice differentiable function such that f (a) = 0,
f (b) = 2, f (c) = 1, f (d) = 2, f (e) = 0, where
a < b < c < d < e, then the minimum number of
zero's of g(x) = {f ' (x)}
2
+ f '' (x). f (x) in the
interval [a, e] is? [IIT-2006]
Sol. Let, g(x) =
dx
d
[f (x) . f '(x)]
to get the zero of g(x) we take function
h(x) = f (x). f ' (x)
between any two roots of h(x) there lies at least one
root of h' (x) = 0
g(x) = 0
h(x) = 0
f (x) = 0 or f ' (x) = 0
If f (x) = 0 has 4 minimum solutions.
f ' (x) = 0 has 3 minimum solutions.
h(x) = 0 has 7 minimum solutions.
h' (x) = g(x) = 0 has 6 minimum solutions

14. The value of

1
0
101 50
1
0
100 50
) 1 (
) 1 ( ) 5050 (
dx x
dx x
[IIT-2006]
Sol. Let I
1
= dx x

1
0
100 50
) 1 ( and I
2
=

1
0
101 50
) 1 ( dx x ,
using Integration by parts
I
2
=
1
0
101 50
] . ) 1 [( x x (101)

1
0
49 100 50
). . 50 ( ) 1 ( x x x dx
= 0

1
0
50 100 50
) ( ) 1 )( 101 )( 50 ( dx x x
I
2
= 5050

1
0
100 50
) 1 ( x ( x
50
) dx
5050 I
1
I
2
= 5050

1
0
100 50
) 1 ( x dx
+ 5050

1
0
100 50
) 1 ( x ( x
50
) dx
= 5050

1
0
101 50
) 1 ( x dx = 5050 I
2

5050 I
1
=

I
2
+ 5050 I
2


2
1
) 5050 (
I
I
= 5051.

15. The position vectors of the vertices A, B and C of a
tetrahedron ABCD are
^
i +
^
j +
^
k ,
^
i and 3
^
i ,
respectively. The altitude from vertex D to the
opposite face ABC meets the median line through A
of the triangle ABC at a point E. If the length of the
side AD is 4 and the volume of the tetrahedron is
3
2 2
, find the position vector of the point E for all
its possible positions. [IIT-1996]
Sol. F is mid-point of BC i.e., F
2
3
^ ^
i i+
= 2
^
i
and AE DE (given)


A(i + j + k)
D
C(3i)
F(2i) B(i)
E
1



Let E divides AF in : 1. The position vector of E is
given by

1
) ( 1 2
^ ^ ^ ^
+
+ + + k j i i
=
^
1
1 2
i |
.
|

\
|
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+

Now, volume of the tetrahedron
=
3
1
(area of the base) (height)

3
2 2
=
3
1
(area of the ABC) (DE)
But area of the ABC = | ) ( |
2
1

BA BC
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 14 JANUARY 2011
= | ) ( 2 |
2
1 ^ ^ ^
k j i + = | ) |
^ ^ ^ ^
k i j i +
= | ) |
^ ^
j k = 2
Therefore,
3
2 2
=
3
1
) 2 ( (DE)
DE = 2
Since ADE is a right angle triangle,
AD
2
= AE
2
+ DE
2

(4)
2
= AE
2
+ (2)
2

AE
2
= 12
But

AE =
^
1
1 2
i
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+
) (
^ ^ ^
k j i + +
=
^
1
i
+


^
1
j
+


^
1
k
+



2
| |

AE =
2
) 1 (
1
+
[
2
+
2
+
2
] =
2
2
) 1 (
3
+


Therefore, 12 =
2
2
) 1 (
3
+


4( + 1)
2
=
2

4
2
+ 4 + 8 =
2

3
2
+ 8 + 4 = 0
3
2
+ 6 + 2 + 4 = 0
3( + 2) + 2( + 2) = 0
(3 + 2) ( + 2) = 0
= 2/3, = 2
Therefore, when = 2/3, position vector of E is
given by

^
1
1 2
i |
.
|

\
|
+
+
+
^
1
1
j
+
+
^
1
1
k
+

=
^
1 3 / 2
1 ) 3 / 2 .( 2
i
+
+
+
^
1 3 / 2
1
j
+
+
^
1 3 / 2
1
k
+

=
^
3
3 2
1 3 / 4
i
+
+
+
^
3
3 2
1
j
+
+
^
3
3 2
1
k
+

=
^
3 / 1
3
3 4
i
+
+
^
3 / 1
1
j +
^
3 / 1
1
k
=
^
i +
^
3j +
^
3k
and when = 2
Position vector of E is given by,

^
1 2
1 ) 2 ( 2
i
+
+
+
^
1 2
1
j
+
=
^
1 2
1
k
+
=
^
1
1 4
i
+

^
j
^
k
=
^
3i
^
j
^
k
Therefore,
^
i +
^
3 j +
^
3k and +
^
3i
^
j
^
k are the
position vector of E.

















































MOTIVATION
Pull the string, and it will follow wherever you
wish. Push it, and it will go nowhere at all.
Be the change that you want to see in the
world.
Efficiency is doing things right; effectiveness is
doing the right things.
Formula for success: under promise and over
deliver.
A life spent making mistakes is not only more
honorable, but more useful than a life spent
doing nothing.
Discovery consists of seeing what everybody
has seen and thinking what nobody else has
thought.
The best way to teach people is by telling a
story.
If you'll not settle for anything less than your
best, you will be amazed at what you can
accomplish in your lives.
I had to pick myself up and get on with it, do it
all over again, only even better this time.
Improvement begins with I.
Success depends upon previous preparation,
and without such preparation there is sure to be
failure.
The man of virtue makes the difficulty to be
overcome his first business, and success only a
subsequent consideration.
As a general rule the most successful man in
life is the man who has the best information.
The secret of success is constancy to purpose.
One secret of success in life is for a man to be
ready for his opportunity when it comes.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 15 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 16 JANUARY 2011
























1. Four infinite thin current carrying sheets are placed in
YZ plane. The 2D view of the arrangement is as
shown in fig. Direction of current has also been
shown in the figure. The linear current density. i.e.
current per unit width in the four sheets are I, 2I, 3I
and 4I, respectively.

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Y
I II III IV
X
a a a a

The magnetic field as a function of x is best
represented by





2. Match the column
Column I Column II
(A) a charge particle is (P) Velocity of the
moving in uniform particle may be
electric and magnetic constant
fields in gravity free
space
(B) a charge particle is (Q) Path of the particle
moving in uniform may be straight line
electric, magnetic
and gravitational fields
(C) a charge particle is (R) Path of the particle
moving in uniform may be circular
magnetic and
gravitational fields
(where electric field
is zero)
(D) A charge particle is (S) Path of the particle
moving in only may be helical
uniform electric field
(T) None

3. Magnetic flux in a circular coil of resistance 10
changes with time as shown in fig. Cross indicates a
direction perpendicular to paper inwards.
Match the following

Column I Column II
(A) At 1s, induced current is (P) Clockwise
(B) At 5s, induced current is (Q) Anticlockwise
(C) At 9s, induced current is (R) Zero
(D) At 15s, induced current is (S) 2A
(T) None

This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in physics that would be very helpful in facing IIT
JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and we
hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Dev Sharma
Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch
Physics Challenging Problems
Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
Set # 9
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 17 JANUARY 2011
4. A conducting rod of length l is moved at constant
velocity v
0
on two parallel, concudting, smooth, fixed
rails, which are placed in a uniform constant
magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the
rails as shown in figure. A resistance R is connected
between the two ends of the rail. Then which of the
following is/are correct ?

(A) The thermal power dissipated in the resistor is
equal to the rate of work done by an external
person pulling the rod
(B) If applied external force is doubled, then a part
of the external power increases the velocity of
the rod
(C) Lenzs law is not satisfied if the rod is
accelerated by an external force
(D) If resistance R is doubled, then power required to
maintain the constant velocity v
0
becomes half

5. The x-z plane separates two media A & B of
refractive indices . 2 & 5 . 1
2 1
= = A ray of light
travels from A to B. Its directions in the two media
are given by unit vectors , j b i a
1

+ = . j b i c
2

+ =
Then
(A)
3
4
c
a
= (B)
4
3
c
a
=
(C)
3
4
d
b
= (D)
4
3
d
b
=

6. Two converging lenses of the same focal length f are
separated by distance 2f. The axis of the second lens
is inclined at angle 60 = with respect to the axis
of the first lens. A parallel paraxial beam of light is
incident from left side of the lens. Then

(A) Final image after all possible refraction will
formed at optical centre of first lens
(B) Final image after all possible refraction will
formed at optical centre of second lens
(C) Final image after all possible refraction will
formed at distance f from second lens
(C) Final image after all possible refraction will
formed at distance f from first lens

7. If C
v
for an ideal gas is given by C
v
= (3 + 2T)R,
where T is absolute temperature of gas, then the
equation of adiabatic process for this gas is
(A) VT
2
= constant (B) VT
3
e
-2T
= C
(C) VT
2
e
2T
= constant (D) VT
3
e
2T
= constant
8. The pressure of one mole of ideal gas varies
according to the law
2
0
V P P = where P
0
&
are positive constant constants. The highest
temperature that gas may attain:
(A)
2 / 1
0 0
3
P
R 3
P 2
|
|
.
|

\
|

(B)
2 / 1
0 0
3
P
R 2
P 3
|
|
.
|

\
|


(C)
2 / 1
0 0
3
P
R
P
|
|
.
|

\
|

(D)
2 / 1
0 0
P
R
P
|
|
.
|

\
|



















































Physics Facts
1. Due to gravity, the maximum speed a raindrop
during a rain with falling speed can hit you is
about 18 miles per hour (29 kilometers per
hour).
2. The speed of light in meters is 299,792,458
meters per second. And how on Earth are you
going to remember that? The number can be
remembered from the number of letters in each
word of the following phrase: "We guarantee
certainty, clearly referring to this light
mnemonic."
(The speed of light in miles per second is
186,282.397051221, or in miles per hour,
670,616,629.384395).
3. In air, at a temperature of 32 degrees
Fahrenheit/0 degrees Celsius (freezing point of
water) the speed of sound travels 1,087 feet
(331 meters) per second. (It travels faster at
higher temperatures).
(In 64 degrees Fahrenheit [18 degrees Celsius]
the speed of sound travels 1,123 feet [342
meters] per second).
4. If an object floats on water, it displaces the
water equal to its mass, but if the object sinks,
it displaces water equal to its volume.
5. A calorie is defined as the amount of energy
needed to raise one gram of water one degree
Celsius (or from 14.5 degrees Celsius to 15.5
degrees Celsius).

f
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 18 JANUARY 2011







1. As shown in graph, the relation of U v/s PV is linear So,
a PV U + = ). (tan as b = ) (tan
So, U = b, PV + a
Using ideal gas equation PV = nRT
U = b (nRT) + a
Differentitate it,
dU = nbRdT
As dU = n C
V
dT
So b
f
R
f
bR C
V
= = =
2 2

Degrees of freedom of the gas, as b = 3
So f = 6
Degrees of freedom are 6 so it is triatomic non-linear
gas.

2.
b f 2
2
1
2
1 + = + = as f = 2b
So,
1
1

+ = b

3. As C
V
= bR it is not dependent on a so if a varies
there is no change in the value of C
V

a
C
V



4. As C
V
= b R and ,
2
2
1 0
t C C b
f
+ = =

2
1 0
2 2 t C C f + = and t C
dt
df
1
4 =
Df/dt v/s t graph is a straight line with slope 4C
1
.

5. As

v and

B are mutually perpendicular so path will


be circular but due to presence of resistive medium
speed decreases and radius of circular path decreases.
So, path is spiral of decreasing radius
Option (D) is correct
6. If v
ab
= 0, then irrespective to the value of capacitance
C energy stored will be zero.
v
ab
=
2 1
2 2 1 1
/ 1 / 1
) / ( /
R R
R R
+
+
= 0
So,
1
1
R

1
1
R

= 0
1
1
R

=
2
2
R


2
1
R
R
=
2
1

2
R
R
1
R
2

1
C


Option (A) is correct

7. To calculate time constant
Replace voltage source by short circuit mean by zero
resistance and then find R
eq
with C and time
constant = R
eq
.C
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
+
R
R R
R R
2 1
2 1
C

R
R
1
R
2
C

R
2
R
1
R
2
/R
1
+R
2
C


Option (D) is correct


8. Maximum current through the resistance
I
max

=
R
v
ab
=
R
R R R R
2 1 2 2 1 1
/ 1 / 1 / ) / ( ) / ( + +
=
R
eq

Option (C) is correct.








Solution
Physics Challenging Problems
Set # 8
8
Quest i ons were Publ i shed i n December Issue
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 19 JANUARY 2011













1. A solid uniform sphere of radius r rolls without
sliding along the inner surface of a fixed spherical
shell of radius R and performs small oscillations.
Calculate period of these oscillations.
Sol. Let the solid sphere be rotated through a very small
angle , then displacement of its centre is equal to
AB = r.. During this rotation point of contact
changes from C to C' and inclination of radius OC' of
the shell with vertical becomes equal to
=
) ( r R radius
AB arc
as shown in Figure.

B

C'
A
C
O

=
) ( r R
r
...(i)
When the solid sphere is released from this position,
it starts to roll down towards equilibrium position C.
Let its angular acceleration be . Then acceleration
of its centre will be equal to r.
Consider free body diagram of the sphere Figure.
mg cos
I
mg sin
Friction
C'
N

since, C ' is instantaneous axis of rotation, therefore,
taking moments about it,
(mg sin ) r = I
or mgr . sin = |
.
|

\
|
2
5
7
mr
But is very small, therefore, sin
mgr . =
5
7
mr
2

or =
5
7
r
g

Substituting value of from equation (1),
Angular acceleration, =
) ( 7
5
r R
g

Since, angular acceleration is restoring and is directly
proportional to angular displacement , therefore, the
sphere performs SHM. Hence, its period of
oscillation is given by
T =
on accelerati angular
nt displaceme angular
2
or T =
g
r R
5
) ( 7
2 Ans.

2. Three identically charged, small spheres each of mass
m are suspended from a common point by insulated
light strings each of length l. The spheres are always
on vertices of an equilateral triangle of length of the
sides x (<< l). Calculate the rate dq/dt with which
charge on each sphere increases if length of the sides
of the equilateral triangle increases slowly according
to law
dt
dx
=
x
a
.
Sol. Since dx/dt is given as
x
a
, therefore, to calculate
dt
dq
, first q is to be calculated in terms of x.
Since, side of equilateral triangle is x, therefore,
electrostatic force between two particles is
F ' =
0
4
1

2
2
x
q

Positions of particles A, B & C with respect to each
other are shown in Figure (A).
F
F '
F '
A
x
x
G
C
60
60
B
Fig.(A)


Resultant electrostatic force on particle A is
F = 2F' cos 30.
Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students' Forum
PHYSI CS
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 20 JANUARY 2011
or F =
2
0
2
4
3
x
q


In Figure (A) G is centroid of the triangle.
Distance of centroid G from every particle is
r =
3
2
x cos 30 =
3
x

Since, G is centroid, therefore, it always lies
vertically below the point of suspension. Figure (B)
shows a vertical plane passing through particle A and
centroid G. All of the forces acting on particle A are
shown in this figure.

G
r
T
x
mg
F
Fig.(B)


Considering horizontal forces on the particle A,
T sin = F ...(i)
For vertical forces, T cos = mg ...(ii)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii)
tan =
mg
F
...(iii)
Since, x < < l, therefore, inclination of each thread
with the vertical is very small.
Hence, tan sin =
l
r
=
3 l
x

From equation (iii)
3 l
x
=
2
0
2
4
3
mgx
q


or q =
l
mg
3
4
0

x
3/2


dt
dq
=
xt
dx
x
l
mg
2
3
3
4
0


or
dt
qd
=
l
mga
2
0
3
Ans.

3. A coil of radius R carries current I. Another
concentric coil of radius r(r < < R) carries current i.
Planes of two coils are mutually perpendicular and
both the coils are free to rotate about common
diameter. Find maximum kinetic energy of smaller
coil when both the coils are released, masses of coils
are M and m respectively.
Sol. If a magnetic dipole having moment M be rotated
through angle '' from equilibrium position in a
uniform magnetic field B, work done on it is W = MB
(1 cos ). This work is stored in the system in the
form of energy. When system is released, dipole
starts to rotate to occupy equilibrium position and the
energy converts into kinetic energy and kinetic
energy of the system is maximum when stored
energy is completely released.

Magnetic induction, at centres due to current in larger
coil is B =
R
I
2
0


Magnetic dipole moment of smaller coil is ir
2
.
Initially planes of two coils are mutually
perpendicular, therefore is 90 or energy of the
system is U = (ir
2
) B (1 cos 90)
or U =
R
r Ii
2
2
0


When coils are released, both the coils start to rotate
about their common diameter and their kinetic
energies are maximum when they become coplaner.
Moment of Inertia of larger coil about axis of rotation
is I
1
=
2
1
MR
2
and that of smaller coil is I
2
=
2
1
mr
2

Since, two coils rotate due to their mutual interaction
only, therefore, if one coil rotates clockwise then the
other rotates anticlockwise.
Let angular velocities of larger and smaller coils be
numerically equal to
1
and
2
respectively when
they become coplaner,
According to law of conservation of angular
momentum,
I
1

1
= I
2

2
...(i)
and according to law of conservation of energy,

2
1 1
2
1
I +
2
2 2
2
1
I = U ...(ii)
From above equations, maximum kinetic energy of
smaller coil,

2
2 2
2
1
I =
2 1
1
I I
UI
+

=
) ( 2
2 2
2
0
mr MR
MRr Ii
+

Ans.

4. RMS velocity of molecules of a di-atomic gas is to be
increased to 1.5 times. Calculate ratio of initial
volume to final volume, if it is done
(i) Adiabatically ; (ii) Isobarically ;
(iii) Calculate, also ratio of work done by gas during
these processes.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 21 JANUARY 2011
Sol. R.M.S. velocity of gas molecules T .
where T is absolute temperature of the gas.
Therefore, to increase RMS velocity to 1.5 times, the
temperature is to be increased to (1.5)
2
= 2.25 times.
Let initial volume and temperature by V
0
and T
0

respectively and let final volume and temperature be
V and T respectively, then T = 2.25. T
0

(i) For adiabatic process, T.V
( 1)
= constant

) 1 (
0

|
.
|

\
|
V
V
=
0
T
T
= 2.25
But for diatomic gas = 1.4

V
V
0
= (2.25)
2.5
= (1.5)
5
= 7.594 Ans.(i)
Work done by gas during the process,
W
1
=
) 1 (

0 0

PV V P
=
) 1 (
) T T ( nR
0


(ii) For isobaric process,
T
V
= constant

V
V
0
=
T
T
0
=
25 . 2
1
=
9
4
Ans.(ii)
Work done by gas during the process,
W
2
= nR (TT
0
)
(iii) Ratio of work done by gas during these processes
is

2
1
W
W
=
) 1 (
1

= 2.5 Ans.(iii)

5. Suppose potential energy between electron and
proton at separation r is given by U = K log r, where
K is a constant. For such a hypothetical hydrogen
atom, calculate radius of n
th
Bohr's orbit and energy
levels.
Sol. If potential energy of a system of two particles,
separated by a distance r is U, interaction force
between the particles is F =
dr
dU
.
Since, potential energy of system of electron and
proton in a hypothetical hydrogen atom is given by
U = K log r, therefore, force between them,
F =
dr
dU
=
r
K

Negative sign indicates force of attraction.
This force of attraction between electron and proton
provides centripetal force required for circular
motion of electron.

r
mv
2
=
r
K
where m is mass of electron and v is
its speed.
or mv
2
= K ...(i)
According to Bohr's postulates, angular momentum,
mur = n
2
h
...(ii)
From equation (i) and (ii),
r =
mK
nh
2
Ans.
total energy of the atom is E = potential energy U +
kinetic energy |
.
|

\
|
2
2
1
mv of electron
E = K log r +
2
1
K =
2
K
(2 log r + 1)
=
2
K
(1 + log r
2
)
Substituting value of r,
E =
(
(

|
|
.
|

\
|

+
mK
h n K
2
2 2
2
log 1
2
Ans.











Birth of New Red Spot is the
Thunderstorm on Jupiter
During the past few months, the astronomers have
tracked an emerging second red spot on Jupiter, a
growing rival about one-half the diameter of the
planet's Great Red Spot. The Hubble Space
Telescope has snapped the first detailed pictures of
what some observers now call Red Spot Jr.
Astronomers at the Space Telescope Science
Institute in Boltimore said this was the first time
scientists have witnessed the birth of these huge
oval spots, presumably a convective phenomenon
like a powerful thunderstorm. The Great spot was
already present when the observers first looked with
telescope at the planet some 400 years ago. Red
Spot Jr. appeared in near-infrared images to be as
bright in Jupiter's cloudy atmosphere as its big
companion. The size of Red Spot Jr. is half the size
of its big companion. The scientists say the new
storm might rise higher above the main cloud deck
than the older spot.

In a New Light: Jupiter, with its second red
spot, in a picture released by NASA.
Current observations, including Hubble pictures
taken on May 12 and 18, show that the smaller red
spot is drifting eastward in the Jovian Southern
hemisphere and the Great Red Spot is moving
westward. They should pass one another in early
July. The pictures of the Red Spots are contrast-
enhanced images taken in visible light and at near-
infrared wave lengths. But the red spots, new and
old, are really red.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 22 JANUARY 2011














Prism :
(i) Deviation '' produced by the prism,


B C
A
Normal
Normal
i i'
Q P
r
r'


= i + i' A
and A = r + r'
(ii) For minimum deviation '
m
'
i = i' and r = r' and also PQ||BC and the refractive
index for the material of prism is given by
=
|
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
| +
2
sin
2
sin
A
A
m

(iii) i graph for prism

m
i


(iv) For not transmitting the ray from prism,
> cosec |
.
|

\
|
2
A

(v) For grazing incidence i = 90 and for grazing
emergence i' = 90. For maximum deviation i = 90 or
i' = 90
(vi) The limiting angle of prism = 2C
when i = i' = 90
If the angle of prism A > 2C, then the rays are totally
reflected.



(vii) Right-angled prism : These prisms are used to turn a
light beam to 90 or 180. These are usually made of
crown glass for which
g
= 1.5 and C =tan
1
|
|
.
|

\
|
g

1
= 42.
Such prisms are used in binoculars and submarine
periscopes.
(viii) Deviation produced by a thin prism = ( 1)A
(ix) Angular dispersion D =
v

R
= (
V

R
)A
Where V and R stand for violet and red colours
respectively.
Mean deviation
Y
= (
Y
1)A
where
Y
is the refractive index of mean yellow
colour.
(x) Dispersive Power, =
deviation Mean
dispersion Angular

=
Y
R V



=
1

Y
R V
where
Y
=
2
R V
+

(xi) Pair of prisms (or crossed prism) : Two thin prisms
of different material when placed crossed, i.e., with
their refracting edges parallel and pointing in
opposite directions as shown in figure, produce a
total deviation given by
=
1
~
2

where
1
and
2
are the mean deviations produced by
the first and second prism respectively.
Total angular dispersion
D = D
1
~ D
2

where D
1
and D
2
are the angular dispersions
produced by respective prisms.
(xii) Dispersion without deviation : If the angle of two
prisms A and A' are so adjusted that the deviation
produced by the mean ray by the first prism is equal
and opposite to that produced by the second prism,
then the total final beam will be parallel to the
incident beam and there will be dispersion without
deviation.
Prism & Wave Nature of Light
PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 23 JANUARY 2011

A
Crown
glass
Flint
glass
A'

Here,
=
1

2
= 0 or
1
=
2

i.e., (
1
1)A = (
2
1)A'
This combination produces total angular dispersion.
D = D
1
D
2
= (
1V

1R
) A (
2V

2R
)A'
(xiii) Deviation without dispersion :
If the combination is such that D = D
1
~ D
2
= 0
or D
1
= D
2

or (
1V

1R
) A = (
2V

2R
)A'
The combination is said to be achromatic and the
total mean deviation will be
=
1
~
2
= (
1
1)A ~ (
2
1)A'
Wave Nature of light
Wave front :
A point source produces a spherical wave front
|
.
|

\
|

r
1
A or
(

2
r
1
1
Where A = Amplitude, I = intensity and
r = distance of point of observation from source.
A line source produces a cylindrical form
(

r
A
1
or
(

r
I
1
.
Wave front is locus of points in the same phase.
A distance source produce a plane wave front.
Wave front for a parallel beam of light is plane.
The angle between ray and wave front is 90
Huygen's principle:
Huygen's principle is a geometrical method to find
secondary wave front produced by a primary wave
front.







Thin lines shows the rays of light.
Dotted line shows the wavefronts.
Interference of light :
(a) Redistribution of light energy i.e. alternate
maximum and minima).
Conditions for two light waves producing
interference is that
(i) Wave should be of same wavelength/frequency.
(ii) Waves should be travelling in the same direction.
(iii)Wave should have a constant phase difference
For the above conditions the two source must be
coherent and that is possible when we make two
sources out of a single source of light.
For monochromatic light we get alternate maxima
and minima of same colour. For white light we
get white central fringe flanked by coloured
fringes because fringe width of different colour is
different due to different wavelengths.
(b) Resultant intensity at a point is
I = I
1
+ I
2
+ 2
2 1
I I cos
When I
1
= I
2
= I
0
then I = 4I
0
cos
2
/2
For constructive interference
= 2n and x = n
I
max
= (
1
I +
2
I )
2
(A
1
+ A
2
)
2
[Q I A
2
]
For destructive interference
= (2n + 1) and x = |
.
|

\
|

2
1
n
I
min
= (
1
I
2
I )
2
(A
1
A
2
)
2


min
max
I
I
=
) (
) (
2 1
2 1
I I
I I

+
=
2
2 1
2
2 1
) (
) (
A A
A A

+

The energy remains conserved during the process
of interference.
P

S
1
S
2

Intensity of light at any point P as shown the
figure I = I
0
cos
2
|
.
|

\
|

tan d

(c) The fringe width =
d
D

Angular width =
D

=
d


does not depend on D
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 24 JANUARY 2011
(d) When the source of light is placed asymmetrical
with respect to the slits then the central maxima
also shifts.


S
2
x

y
D
x
D
y


S
1
S



y
D
y
=
x
D
x
and =
(e) If young's double slit experiment is done in a
liquid of refractive index medium then the
fringe width = /
(f)

P
S
1
S
2
t
O
O

If a transparent sheet of thickness t is placed in
front of upper slit then the central maxima shift
upside. The new optical path becomes t instead
of t and the increase in optical path is ( 1)t.
The shift =
d
D
( 1) t =

( 1)t
(g) Interference in thin films :


r
r
r r
2
1
i
t
Transmitted rays

For reflected rays interference
Maxima 2 t cos r = (2n 1)
2


Minima 2 t cos r = n

Diffraction :
Bending of light through an aperture / corner when
the dimension of aperture is comparable to the
wavelength of light is called diffraction.
Fraunhoffer diffraction at a single slit
Condition for minima :
a sin
n
= n
Condition of secondary maxima :
a sin
n
=
2 2
1
|
.
|

\
|
+ n Where n = n = 1, 2 ...
Width of central maxima = 2D/a

P
O

a

Angular width of central maxima = 2/a
Angular width of secondary maxima = /a
Intensity at any point P = I
0
2
sin
(


where =

(a sin )
The ratio of intensities of secondary maxima are
22
1
,
61
1
,
121
1
, ...
For a path difference of , the phase difference is
2 radian.
Polarisation :

I
0
Unpolarised
light
Polarised
light

I cos
2
I = I
0
/2



r
i
p
Medium 1
Medium 2



i
p
= Angle of polarization, i
p + r
= 90, = tan i
p


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 25 JANUARY 2011

Solved Examples

1. (i) A ray of light incident normally on one of the
faces of a right-angled isosceles prism is found to be
totally reflected. What is the minimum value of the
refractive index of the material of prism ?
(ii) When the prism is immersed in water, trace the
path of the emergent ray for the same incident ray
indicating the values of all the angles (

= 4/3)
Sol. (i) According to the problem, A = 90, B = C = 45.
At face BC, incident ray PQ is totally reflected
therefore i C fig.

P
B A
R
r=i
N
i
45
Q
N
C

Here i = 45, C
max
= 45; = 1/sin C
or
min
= (1/sin C
max
) = (1/sin 45) = 2 = 1.414
(ii) When the prism is immersed in water, then for
normal incident ray, the ray passes undeviated up to
PQ and becomes incident at face BC at angle of
incidence 45(fig.) The ray travels from glass to
water, therefore from Snell's law,

r sin
i sin
=
1
2

, we have
r sin
45 sin
=
g
w

=
g

w

sin r =
w g

45 sin
=
w

45 sin

g

=
2
1

3 / 4
414 . 1
=
4
3
= 0.75
r = sin
1
(0.75) = 4836

P
B A
R
90
45
45
Q
r
C
45
R

The path of light ray is shown in fig.

2. The cross-section of a glass prism has the form of an
isosceles triangle. One of the equal faces is coated
with silver. A ray is normally incident on another
unsilvered face and being reflected twice emerges
through the base of the prism perpendicular to it.
Find the angles of the prism.
Sol. Suppose refracting angle of prism be and other two
base angles of the isosceles prism be . The light ray
PQ, incident normally on the face AB, is refracted
undeviated along QR. The refracted ray QR strikes
the silvered face AC and gets reflected from it. The
reflected ray RS now strikes the face AB from where
it is again reflected along ST and emerges
perpendicular to base BC.
A
B
C
P
R
S
Q
90
N
2
N
2
N
1 i =


=
N
1
T
i


It follows from fig. that angle of incidence on face
AC = i = and also angle of incidence of face
AB = = As N
2
N
2
is parallel to PR, hence = 2i
i.e., = 2
Also + 2 = 180 or + 2(2) = 180
or = 36 so = 2 = 72

3. Two coherent light sources A and B with separation
2 are placed on the x-axis symmetrically about the
origin. They emit light of wavelength . Obtain the
positions of maximum on a circle of large radius,
lying in the xy-plane and with centre at the origin.
Sol. Distance between two coherent light sources = 2.
Consider the interference of waves at some point C of
the circumference of circle.
BC = ) cos r 2 r (
2 2
+
AC = ) cos r 2 r (
2 2
+ +
Path difference = AC BC = (For Maxima)
It is clear from figure, that
Path difference = AC BC = AP + OM = 2 cos
Y
X
C
M
r
P

O A
B


2 cos = or cos = 1/2
Possible values of angle = 60, 120, 180, 240,
300, 360.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 26 JANUARY 2011
4. Two point coherent sources are on a straight line
d = n apart. The distance of a screen perpendicular
to the line of the sources is D >> d from the nearest
source. Calculate the distance of the point on the
screen where the first bright fringe is formed.
Sol. Consider any point P on the screen at a distance x
from O. Then
d
O
D
S
2
S
1


2
1
D = D
2
+ x
2
or D
1
= D
2 / 1
2
2
1
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
D
x
= D
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
2
2
1
D
x
;
D
1
= D +
D
x
2
2

Similarly, D
2
= (D + d) +
) ( 2
2
d D
x
+

D
2
D
1
(D + d) +
) ( 2
2
d D
x
+
D
D
x
2
2

= d +
2
2
x
|
.
|

\
|

+ D d D
1 1
= d d
) ( 2
2
d D D
x
+


O
D
D
2
S
1
S
2
D
1
x
P
d


For the point O, D
2
D
1
= d = n (given).
Thus there is brightness at O of nth order. Since the
path difference decreases, the other fringes will be of
lower order. The next bright fringe will be of
(n 1)th order. Hence for the next bright fringe
D
2
D
2
= (n 1)
d d
) ( 2
2
d D D
x
+
= (n 1)
n n
) ( 2
2
+ n D D
x
= (n 1)
x =
n
n D D ) ( 2 +



5. One slit of a Young's experiment is covered by a
glass plate (n = 1.4) and the other by another glass
plate (n' = 1.7) of the same thickness t. The point of
central maximum on the screen, before the plates
were introduced, is now occupied by the previous
fifth bright fringe. Find the thickness of the plates
( = 4800 )
Sol. Path of the wave from slit S
1
= D
1
+ n't t
Path of the wave from slit S
2
= D
2
+ nt t
Path difference = D
2
+ nt t D
1
n't + t
= (D
2
D
1
) + (n n')t

O
D
D
2
S
1
S
2
D
1
O
d
x

But D
2
D
1
=
D
xd

Path difference =
D
xd
+ (n n')t
Let O' be the point where paths difference is zero.

D
xd
= (n' n)t
or, x =
d
D
(n' n) t =

t n n ) ' (
(


=
d
D
Q
Given that x = 5 5 =

t n n ) ' (

or, t =
n ' n
5

or, t =
4 . 1 7 . 1
10 4800 5
10

= 8 m.























WATER CAN CRACK METAL

Did you know that water can expand in volume by
around 1/9th of its total composition. This means
that when frozen it occupies more space than when
in liquid form.
The above phenomena is very common in houses
where water pipes burst over the winter due to ice
forming in the pipes. The pipes which were once
wide enough for water to go through are now too
small when the ice forms.
The brittle nature of the metal when it feezes
combined with the ice expanding causes them to
crack. In fact the enormous power of frozen water is
also used in quarries to loosen up huge blocks of
rocks.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 27 JANUARY 2011


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 28 JANUARY 2011











Key Concepts :
1. Equation of a harmonic wave is y = a sin(kx t ).
Here y is measure of disturbance from zero level.
y may represent as electric field, magnetic field,
pressure etc. Also K = 2/ = wave number.
Note : The positive sign between kx and t shows
that the wave propagates is the + x direction. If the
wave travels in the X direction then negative sign is
used between kx and t.
2. Particle Velocity :
v =
dt
dy
= a cos (kx t )
Maximum particle velocity = a = velocity amplitude
Particle velocity is different from wave velocity.
The wave velocity v = v.
3. Particle acceleration :
A =
dt
dv
=
2
2
dt
y d
= a
2
cos(kx + t ) =
2
y
Max acceleration = acceleration amplitude =
2
a
4. Velocity of transverse wave on a string =
m
T

Where m = mass per unit length =
4
2
D

Where = density of the wire material and
D = diameter of wire
More the tension, more is the velocity
5. A wave, after reflection from a free end, suffers no
change of .
A wave, after reflection from a free end, suffers no
change in the phase.
6. Velocity of sound in a fluid =

B

For air B = P v =

P
=
M
RT

Velocity of sound in general follows the order
V
solid
> V
liquid
> V
gas

Velocity of sound T
Also velocity of sound M /
and velocity of sound / 1 .
But velocity of sound does not depend on pressure
because P/ becomes constant.
Velocity of sound depend on the frame of reference.
7. (a) According to principle of superposition

y =

1
y +

2
y + .
(b) Interference of waves y
1
= A
1
sin(kx t)
y
2
= A
2
sin(kx t + )
For constructive interference = 2n
n = 0, 1, 2,
(i) I
max
= (
1
I +
2
I )
2

(waves should be in same phase)
(ii) A
max
= A
1
+ A
2

For destructive interference = (2n + 1)
n = 0, 1, 2,
(i) I
min
= (
1
I
2
I )
2

(waves should be in opposite phase)
(ii) A
min
= A
1
A
2

(c) I = I
1
+ I
2
+ 2
2 1
I I cos
Where is the phase difference between the two
waves.
8. Beats : When two waves of same amplitude with
slight difference in frequency (<10), traveling in the
same direction superpose, beats are produced.
The equation for beats is
y =
(


2
) cos(
2
2 1
t
A sin |
.
|

\
|
2
2 1
t
Where amplitude at a given location
= 2Acos |
.
|

\
|
2
2 1
t
The above expression shows that amplitude change
with time.
Beat frequency = no of maxima / minima per second
= v
1
v
2

Waves & Doppler Effect

PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 29 JANUARY 2011
9. Standing waves (stationary)
When two waves of same amplitude and frequency
moving in opposite direction superimpose, standing
waves are produced.
Nodes are the point where the displacement is
always zero.
The amplitudes of different particles different and
is maximum at antinodes.
The equation of standing waves is
The above expression shows that the amplitude is
different for different values of x and varies
sinusoidally.
For a node to occur at position x, y = 0 kx = 0
For an antinode two occur at position x, y should
be max kx = /2 , .
In terms of pressure P = P
0
cos kx cos t.
10. For standing waves on strings (and both end open
organ pipe)
Fundamental frequency v
0
=
0

v
=
l 2
v

First mode of vibration v
1
=
1

v
= 2 |
.
|

\
|
l 2
v

= 2v
0
= 2
nd
harmonic
nth mode of vibration v
n
= n |
.
|

\
|
l 2
v
= nv
0

= nth harmonic where v =
m
T
for string.
Also more the tension in the same string, higher is
the value of v
0

11. For closed organ pipe :
Fundamental frequency v
0
=
0

v
=
l 4
v

First mode of vibration v
1
=
1

v
= 3 |
.
|

\
|
l 4
v
= 3v
0

= Third harmonic
n
th
mode of vibration v
n
= (2n + 1)
l 4
v

where n = 1, 2, ..
In case where end correction is taken replace l by
(l + e)
12. (a) Intensity of sound at a distance r from a point
source is I =
2
4 r
P

where P = power of source.


(b) For a line source I =
l r
P


where l is the length of source
(c) I =
2
1
v(4
2
v
2
)A
2
=
2
) amplitude essure (Pr
2

13. Doppler's effect :
v = v
0 (

s
L
v v
v v
v
L
= velocity of listener
The above formula is valid when v
s
< v
Replace v by (v v
m
) if it is given that the
medium also moving.
When listener and source are not moving along
the line joining the two, then the component of
velocity along the line joining the two are taken
as velocity of listener or source.
14. If the source and listener are on the same vehicle and
the sound is reflected from a stationary object
towards which the vehicle is approaching then the
frequency of sound as heard by the observer is
v = v
0 (

+
+
s
L
v v
v v

15. For a path difference of , the phase difference is 2
for harmonic waves.
16. For a transverse wave the energy per unit length
possessed by a string is given as

l d
dE
= m(4
2
f
2
)A
2
cos
2
(kx t)
17. Equation for a wave pulse is y = f(x + vt)
18. When a wave on reaching on interface is partly
reflected and partly transmitted then for no power
loss.
P
i
= P
t
+ P
r
where P
i
= Power of incident wave
P
t
= Power of transmitted wave
P
r
= Power of reflected wave.
Also in this case A
r
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+

1 2
1 2
v v
v v
A
i
; A
t
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2 1
2
2
v v
v
A
i

Where A
i
, A
r
and A
t
are amplitudes of incident
reflected and transmitted waves v
1
is the velocity in
the medium of incidence and v
2
is the velocity in the
medium where transmitted wave is present.
Problem Solving Strategy : Mechanical Waves
Identify the relevant concepts : Wave problems fall
into two broad categories. Kinematics problems are
concerned with describing wave motion; they involve
wave speed v, wave length (or wave number k),
frequency f (or angular frequency ), and amplitude
A. They may also involve the position, velocity, and
acceleration of individual particles in the medium.
Dynamics problems also use concepts from Newton's
laws such as force and mass. In this chapter we'll
encounter problems that involve the relation of wave
speed to the mechanical properties of the wave
medium. We'll get into these relations.
As always, make sure that you identify the target
variable(s) for the problem. In some cases it will be
the wavelength, frequency, or wave speed; in other
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 30 JANUARY 2011
cases you'll be asked to find an expression for the
wave function.
Set up the problem using the following steps :
Make a list of the quantities whose value are
given. To help you visualize the situation, you'll
find it useful to sketch graphs of y versus x (fig.
a) and of y versus (fig. b). Label your graphs with
the values of the known quantities.

y
Wave displacement
versus coordinate x
at time t = 0
Wavelength
A
A
(a)
y
Wave displacement
versus time t at
coordinate x = 0
Period T
A
A
(b)
t t

Decide which equations you'll need to use. If any
two of v, f, and are given, you'll need to use eq.
v = f (periodic wave) to find the third quantity. If
the problem involves the angular frequency and
/ or the wave number k, you'll need to use the
definitions of those quantities and eq. ( = vk).
You may also need the various forms of the wave
function given in Eqs.
y(x, t) = A cos
(

|
.
|

\
|
t
v
x
= A cos 2f |
.
|

\
|
t
v
x
,
y(x, t) = A cos 2 |
.
|

\
|

T
t x

and y(x, t) = A cos (kx t).
If the wave speed is not given, and you don't have
enough information to determine it using v = f,
you may be able to find v using the relationship
between v and the mechanical properties of the
system.
Execute the solution as follows : Solve for the
unknown quantities using the equations you've
selected. In some problems all you need to do is find
the value of one of the wave variables.
If you're asked to determine the wave function, you
need to know A and any two of v, and f(or v, k and
). Once you have this information, you can use it in
eq. ( = vk). You may also need the various forms of
the wave function given in Eqs.
y(x, t) = A cos
(

|
.
|

\
|
t
v
x
= A cos 2f |
.
|

\
|
t
v
x
,
y(x, t) = A cos 2 |
.
|

\
|

T
t x
and y(x, t) = A cos (kx t)
to get the specific wave function for the problem at
hand. Once you have that, you can find the value of y
at any point (value of x) and at any time by
substituting into the wave function.
Evaluate your answer : Look at your results with a
critical eye. Check to see whether the values of v, f,
and (or v, , and k) agree with the relationships
given in eq. . v = f or w = vk. If you've calculated the
wave function, check one or more special cases for
which you can guess what the results ought to be.
Problem Solving Strategy : Standing waves
Identify the relevant concepts : As with traveling
waves, it's useful to distinguish between the purely
kinematic quantities, such as wave speed v,
wavelength , and frequency f, and the dynamic
quantities involving the properties of the medium,
such as F and for transverse waves on a string.
Once you decide what the target variable is, try to
determine whether the problem is only kinematic in
nature or whether the properties of the medium are
also involved.
Set up the problem using the following steps :
In visualizing nodes and antinodes in standing
waves, it is always helpful to draw diagrams. For
a string you can draw the shape at one instant and
label the nodes N and antinodes A. The distance
between two adjacent nodes or two adjacent
antinodes is always /2, and the distance between
a node and the adjacent antinode is always /4.
Decide which equation you'll need to use. The
wave function for the standing wave is almost
always useful ex. y(x, t) = (A
SW
sin kx) sin t.
You can compute the wave speed if you know
either and f (or, equivalently, k = 2/ and
= 2f) or the properties of the medium (for a
string. F and .)
Execute the solution as follows: Solve for the
unknown quantities using the equations you've
selected. Once you have the wave function, you can
find the value of the displacement y at any point in
the wave medium (value of x) and at any time. You
can find the velocity of a particle in the wave
medium by taking the partial derivative of y with
respect to time. To find the acceleration of such a
particle, take the second partial derivative of y with
respect to time.
Evaluate your answer : Compare your numerical
answers with your diagram. Check that the wave
function is compatible with the boundary conditions
(for example, the displacement should be zero at a
fixed end).
Problem Solving Strategy : Sound Intensity
Identify the relevant concepts : The relationships
between intensity and amplitude of a sound wave are
rather straightforward. Quite a few other quantities
are involved in these relationships, however, so it's
particularly important to deciede which is your target
variable.
Set up the problem using the following steps :
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 31 JANUARY 2011
Sort the various physical quantities into
categories. The amplitude is described by A or
p
max
, and the frequency f can be determined from
, k, or . These quantites are related through the
wave speed v, which in turn is determined by the
properties of the medium: B and for a liquid; ,
T, and M for a gas.
Determine which quantities are given and which
are the unknown target variables. Then start
looking for relationships that take you where you
want to go.
Execute the solution as follows: Use the equations
you've selected to solve for the target variables. Be
certain that all of the quantities are expressed in the
correct units. In particular, if temperature is used to
calculate the speed of sound in a gas, make sure that
it is expressed in Kelvins (Celsius temperature plus
273.15).
Evaluate your answer: There are multiple
relationships among the quantities that describe a
wave. Try using an alternative one to check your
results.
Problem Solving Strategy : Doppler Effect
Identify the relevant concepts : The Doppler effect is
relevant whenever the source of waves, the wave
detector (listener), or both are in motion.
Set up the problem using the following steps :
Establish a coordinate system. Define the positive
direction to be the direction from the listener to
the source, and make sure you know the signs of
all relevant velocities. A velocity in the direction
from the listener toward the source is positive; a
velocity in the opposite direction is negative.
Also, the velocities must all be measured relative
to the air in which the sound is traveling.
Use consistent notation to identify the various
quantities: subscript S for source, L for listener.
Determine which unknown quantities are your
target variables.
Execute the solutions :
Use eq. f
L
=
S
L
v v
v v
+
+
f
S
to relate the frequencies at
the source and the listener, the sound speed, and
the velocities of the source and the listener. If the
source is moving, you can find the wavelength
measured by the listener using Eq.
=
S
f
v

S
S
f
v
=
S
S
f
v v
or =
S
S
f
v v +
.
When a wave is reflected from a surface, either
stationary or moving, the analysis can be carried
out in two steps. In the first, the surface plays the
role of listener; the frequency with which the
wave crests arrive at the surface is f
L
. Then think
of the surface as a new source, emitting waves
with this same frequency f
L
. Finally, determine
what frequency is heard by a listener detecting
this new wave.
Evaluate your answer: Ask whether your final result
makes sense. If the source and the listener are
moving towards each other, f
L
> F
S
; if they are
moving apart, f
L
< f
S
. If the source and the listener
have no relative motion, f
L
= f
S
.




1. A stationary wave is given by
y = 5 sin
3
x
cos 40 t
where x and y are in cm and t is in seconds.
(a) What are the amplitude and velocity of the
component waves whose superposition can give rise
to this vibration ?
(b) What is the distance between the nodes ?
(c) What is the velocity of a particle of the string at
the position x = 1.5 cm when t = 9/8 s ?
Sol. Using the relation 2 sin C cos D = sin (C + D) +
sin(C D)
y = 5 sin
3
x
cos 40 t =
2
5
2 sin
3
x
cos 40t
y =
(

|
.
|

\
|

+ |
.
|

\
|
+

t
x
t
x
40
3
sin 40
3
sin
2
5

=
2
5
.sin |
.
|

\
|
+
3
40
x
t
2
5
sin |
.
|

\
|

3
40
x
t
=
2
5
.sin |
.
|

\
|
+
3
40
x
t +
2
5
sin |
.
|

\
|
+


3
40
x
t
Thus, the given stationary wave is formed by the
superposition of the progressive waves
y
1
=
2
5
sin |
.
|

\
|
+
3
40
x
t and y
2
=
2
5
sin |
.
|

\
|
+


3
x
t 40
Comparing each wave with the standard form of the
progressive wave
y = a sin |
.
|

\
|
+


2
t ; a =
2
5
= 2.5 cm
= 40 or n = 20
and

2
=
3
2
or = 6 cm = 0.06 m
c = n = 20 0.06 = 1.2 ms
1

Distance between the nodes =
2

=
2
06 . 0
= 0.03 m
Q y = 5 sin
3
x
cos 40 t
v =
dt
dy
= 5 40 sin
3
x
sin 40 t
v = 200 sin
3
x
sin 40t
Solved Examples
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 32 JANUARY 2011
At x = 1.5 cm and t =
8
9
s
v = 200 sin 45 = 0

2. An engine blowing a whistle of frequency 133 Hz
moves with a velocity of 60 m s
1
towards a hill from
which an echo is heard. Calculate the frequency of
the echo heard by the driver. (Velocity of sound in air
= 340 ms
1
.)
Sol. The 'image' of the source approaches the driver at the
same speed. Here, the image or echo is the source.
v
s
= + 60 ms
1
, v
0
= 60 ms
1

n =
s
v c
v c

0
n
n =
60 340
) 60 ( 340


133 = 190 Hz

3. A source of sound of frequency 1000 Hz moves to
the right with a speed of 32 ms
1
relative to the
ground. To its right is reflecting surface moving to
the left with a speed of 64 ms
1
relative to the ground.
Take the speed of sound in air to be 332 m s
1
and
find
(a) the wavelength of the sound emitted in air by the
source
(b) the number of waves per second arriving at the
reflecting surface
(c) the speed of the reflected waves, and
(d) the wavelength of the reflected waves
Sol. (a) Due to the motion of the source, the wavelength
(and hence, the frequency) is actually changed
from to such that if n = actual frequency
=
n
v c
S

=
1000
32 332
= 0.3 m
(b) The number of waves arriving at the reflecting
surface is the same as the number of waves
received by an observer moving towards the
source. This is given by the apparent frequency.
n =
S
v c
v c

0
n =
32 332
) 64 ( 332


1000 = 1320 Hz
(c) Same as that of the incident wave because the
speed of a wave depends only on the
characteristics of the medium.
speed of the reflected wave = 332 ms
1

(d) To calculate the wavelength of the reflected wave,
we may consider the source to be stationary and
emitting waves of wavelength 0.3 m. If the
reflector were stationary, waves in a tube of
length c would reach the reflector and the same
number of reflected waves would be contained in
a tube of the same length, so the wavelength of
the reflected wave would also be the same as that
of the incident wave. But when the reflector
moves towards the source with speed v
ref
it would
reflect additional waves contained in v
ref
and the
total number of waves reflected would be
contained in a tube of length
c v
ref
. If is the changed wavelength of the
wave due to the motion of the source
=
|
|
.
|

\
|


) (
ref
ref
v
c
v c
or =
ref
ref
v c
v c
+

=
64 332
64 332
+

0.3 = 0.2 m

4. Find the ratio of the fundamental frequencies of two
identical strings after one of them is stretched by 2%
and the other by 4%.
Sol. n =
m
T
l 2
1
. If l
0
be the initial length and f be
fractional increase in length, l = l
0
+ fl
0
. Since
tension is proportional to the increase in length,
T = k fl
0
where k is a constant.
m =
0 0
l l f
M
+
where M is the mass of the string
n =
) 1 ( 2
1
0
f + l ) 1 (
/
0
0
f
M kf
+ l
l
=
) 1 ( 2
1
0
0
f M
f k
+
l
l

Since l
0
, k and M are constants n
f 1
f
+


2
1
n
n
=
) 1 (
) 1 (
1 2
2 1
f f
f f
+
+
=
) 02 . 0 1 ( 04 . 0
) 04 . 0 1 ( 02 . 0
+
+
= 0.71

5. An open organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of
300 Hz. The first overtone of a closed organ pipe has
the same frequency as the first overtone of the open
pipe. How long is each pipe ? The velocity of sound
in air = 350 ms
1
.
Sol. For a closed pipe n =
l 4
c
and 3n, 5n, 7n, ... are the
overtones. For an open pipe n =
l 2
c
and 2n, 3n, 4n,
... are the overtones.
l =
n
c
2
=
300 2
350

= 0.58 m
The frequency of the first overtone
= 2n = 2 300 = 600 Hz
the frequency of the first overtone of the closed
pipe = 600 = 3n
n = 200 Hz
200 =
l 4
350
or l =
200 4
350

= 0.44 m





XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 33 JANUARY 2011

















Definition and Classification :
Carbohydrates are polyhydroxy aldehydes,
polyhydroxy ketones, or compounds that can be
hydrolyzed to them. A carbohydrate that cannot be
hydrolyzed to simpler compounds is called a
monosaccharide. A carbohydrate that can be
hydrolyzed to two monosaccharide molecules is
called a disaccharide. A carbohydrate that can be
hydrolyzed to many monosaccharide molecules is
called a polysaccharide.
A monosaccharide may be further classified. If it
contains an aldehyde group, it is known as an aldose;
if it contains a keto group, it is known as a ketose.
Depending upon the number of carbon atoms. It
contains, a monosaccharide is known as a triose,
tetrose, pentose, hexose, and so on. An aldohexose,
for example, is a six-carbon monosaccharide
containing an aldehyde group; a ketopentose is a
five-carbon monosaccharide containing a keto group.
Most naturally occurring monosaccharides are
pentoses or hexoses.
Carbohydrates that reduce Fehlings (or Benedicts)
or Tollens reagent are known as reducing sugars.
All monosaccharides, whether aldose or ketose, are
known as reducing sugars. Most disaccharides are
reducing sugars; sucrose (common table sugar) is a
notable exception, for it is a non-reducing sugar.
(+)-Glucose : an aldohexose :
Because it is the unit of which starch, cellulose, and
glycogen are made up, and because of its special role
in biological processes, (+)-glucose is by far the most
abundant monosaccharide- there are probably more
(+)-glucose units in nature than any other organic
groupand by far the most important
monosaccharide.
Cyclic structure of D-(+)-glucose. Formation of
glucosides :
D-(+)-glucose is a pentahydroxy aldehyde. D-(+)-
glucose had been definitely proved to have structure.
CHO
OH
H
OH
OH
H
HO
H
H
CH
2
OH
D-(+)-Glucose

By 1895 it had become clear that the picture of
D-(+)-glucose as a pentahydroxy aldehyde had to be
modified.
Among the facts that had still to be accounted for
were the following:
(a) D-(+)-Glucose fails to undergo certain
reactions typical of aldehydes. Although it is
readily oxidized, it gives a negative Schiff test and
does not form a bisulfite addition product.
(b) D-(+)-Glucose exists in two isomeric forms
which undergo mutarotation. When crystals of
ordinary D-(+)-glucose of m.p. 146C are dissolved
in water, the specific rotation gradually drops from an
initial + 112 to + 52.7. On the other hand, when
crystals of D-(+)-glucose of m.p. 150C (obtained by
crystallization at temperatures above 98C) are
dissolved in water, the specific rotation gradually
rises from an initial + 19 to + 52.7. The form with
the higher positive rotation is called -D-(+)-glucose
and that with lower rotation -D-(+)-glucose. The
change in rotation of each of these to the equilibrium
value is called mutarotation.
(c) D-(+)-Glucose forms two isomeric methyl D-
glucosides. Aldehydes react with alcohols in the
presence of anhydrous HCl to form acetals. If the
alcohol is, say methanol, the acetal contains two
methyl groups :

C=O
H
COCH
3
H
OH
COCH
3
H
OCH
3
CH3OH,H
+
CH3OH,H
+
Aldehyde Hemiacetal Acetal

When D-(+)-glucose is treated with methanol and
HCl, the product, methyl D-glucoside, contains only
one CH
3
group; yet it has properties resembling
those of a full acetal. It does not spontaneously revert
to aldehyde and alcohol on contact with water, but
requires hydrolysis by aqueous acids.
Furthermore, not just one but two of these
monomethyl derivatives of D-(+)-glucose are known,
one with m.p. 165C and specific rotation + 158, and
the other with m.p. 107 C and specific rotation 33.
The isomer of higher positive rotation is called
methyl -D-glucoside, and the other is called methyl
-D-glucoside. These glucosides do not undergo
mutarotation, and do not reduce Tollens or Fehlings
reagent.
Organic
Chemistry
Fundamentals

CARBOHYDRATES
KEY CONCEPT
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 34 JANUARY 2011
D-(+)-Glucose has the cyclic structure represented
crudely by IIa and IIIa, more accurately by IIb and
IIIb.

H
H
HO
H
H
OH
OH
H
OH
1
2
3
4
5
6 CH
2
OH
H OH
OH
OH
H
H
H H
HO
CH
2
OH
O
1
2 3
4
5
6
IIa
IIb
-D-(+)-Glucose (m.p. 146 C, [] = +112)
O


HO
H
HO
H
H
H
OH
H
OH
1
2
3
4
5
6 CH
2
OH
H OH
H
OH
H
H
OH H
HO
CH
2
OH
O
1
2 3
4
5
6
IIIa
IIIb
-D-(+)-Glucose (m.p. 150 C, [] = +19)
O

D-(+)-Glucose is the hemiacetal corresponding to
reaction between the aldehyde group and the C-5
hydroxyl group of the open-chain structure. It has a
cyclic structure simply because aldehyde and alcohol
are part of the same molecule.
There are two isomeric forms of D-(+)-glucose
because this cyclic structure has one more chiral
centre than Fishers original open-chain structure. -
D-(+)-Glucose and -D-(+)-glucose are
diastereomers, differing in configuration about C-1.
Such a pair of distereomers are called anomers.
As hemiacetals, -and -D-(+)- glucose are readily
hydrolyzed by water. In aqueous solution either
anomer is converted via the open-chain forminto
an equilibrium mixture containing both cyclic
isomers. This mutarotation results from the ready
opening and closing of the hemiacetal ring.
The typical aldehyde reactions of D-(+)-glucose
osazone formation, and perhaps reduction of Tollens
and Fehlings reagents are presumably due to a
small amount of open-chain compound, which is
replenished as fast as it is consumed. The
concentration of this open-chain structure, however,
is too low (less than 0.5%) for certain easily
reversible aldehyde reactions like bisulfite addition
and the Schiff test.
Disaccharides :
Disaccharides are carbohydrates that are made up of
two monosaccharide units. On hydrolysis a molecule
of disaccharide yields two molecules of
monosaccharide.
We shall study four disaccharides : (+)-maltose (malt
sugar), (+)-cellobiose, (+)-lactose (milk sugar), and
(+)-sucrose (cane or beet sugar).
(+)-Maltose :
(+)-Maltose can be obtained, among other products,
by partial hydrolysis of starch in aqueous acid. (+)-
Maltose is also formed in one stage of the
fermentation of starch to ethyl alcohol; here
hydrolysis is catalyzed by the enzyme diastase, which
is present in malt (sprouted barley).
Let us look at some of the facts from which the
structure of (+)-maltose has been deduced.
(+)-Maltose has the molecular formula C
12
H
22
O
11
. It
reduces Tollens and Fehlings reagents and hence is
a reducing sugar. It reacts with phenylhydrazine to
yield an osazone, C
12
H
20
O
9
(=NNHC
6
H
5
)
2
. It is
oxidized by bromide water to a monocarboxylic acid,
(C
11
H
21
O
10
)COOH, maltobionic acid. (+)-Maltose
exists in alpha ([] = + 168) and beta ([] = + 112)
forms which undergo mutarotation in solution
(equilibrium [] = + 136).
(+)-Cellobiose :
When cellulose (cotton fibers) is treated for several
days with sulfuric acid and acetic anhydride, a
combination of acetylation and hydrolysis takes
place; there is obtained the octaacetate of (+)-
cellobiose. Alkaline hydrolysis of the octaacetate
yields (+)-cellobiose itself.
Like (+)-maltose, (+)-cellobiose has the molecular
formula C
12
H
22
O
11
, is a reducing sugar, forms an
osazone, exists in alpha and beta forms that undergo
mutarotation, and can be hydrolyzed to two
molecules of D-(+)-glucose. The sequence of
oxidation, methylation, and hydrolysis (as described
for (+)-maltose) shows that (+)-cellobiose contains
two pyranose rings and glucoside linkage to an OH
group on C4.
(+)-Cellobiose differs from (+)-maltose in one
respect : it is hydrolyzed by the enzyme emulsin
(from bitter almonds), not by maltase. Since emulsin
is known to hydrolyze only -glucoside linkages.
(+)-Lactose :
(+)-Lactose makes up about 5% of human milk and
of cows milk. It is obtained commercially as a by-
product of cheese manufacture, being found in the
whey, the aqueous solution that remains after the
milk proteins have been coagulated. Milk sours when
lactose is converted into lactic acid (sour, like all
acids) by bacterial action (e.g., by Lactobacillus
bulgaricus).
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 35 JANUARY 2011
(+)-Lactose has the molecular formula C
12
H
22
O
11
, is a
reducing sugar, forms an osazone, and exists in alpha
and beta forms which undergo mutarotation. Acidic
hydrolysis or treatment with emulsin (which splits
linkages only) converts (+)-lactose into equal
amounts of D-(+)-glucose and D-(+)-galactose. (+)-
Lactose is evidently a -glycoside formed by the
union of a molecule of D-(+)glucose and a molecule
of D-(+)-galactose.
(+)-Sucrose :
(+)-Sucrose is our common table sugar, obtained
from sugar cane and sugar beets. Of organic
chemicals, it is the one produced in the largest
amount in pure form.
(+)-Sucrose has the molecular formula C
12
H
22
O
11
. It
does not reduce Tollens or Fehlings reagent. It is a
non-reducing sugar, and in this respect it differs from
the other disaccharides we have studied. Moreover,
(+)-sucrose does not form an osazone, does not exist
in anomeric forms, and does not show mutarotation
in solution. All these facts indicate that (+)-sucrose
does not contain a freealdehyde or ketone group.
(+)-Sucrose is made up of a D-glucose unit and a D-
fructose unit; since there is no free carbonyl group,
if must be both a D-glucoside and a D-fructoside.
Polysaccharides :
Polysaccharides are compounds made up of many-
hundreds or even thousands-monosaccharide units
per molecule.
Polysaccharides are naturally occurring polymers,
which can be considered as derived from aldoses or
ketoses by polymerization with loss of water. A
polysaccharide derived from hexoses, for example,
has the general formula (C
6
H
10
O
5
)
n
.
The most important polysaccharides are cellulose and
starch. Both are produced in plants from carbon
dioxide and water by the process of photosynthesis.
Starch :
Starch occurs as granules whose size and shape are
characteristic of the plant from which the starch is
obtained. When intact, starch granules are insoluble
in cold water; if the outer membrane has been broken
by grinding, the granules swell in cold water and
form a gel.
In general, starch contains about 20% of a water-
soluble fraction called amylose, and 80% of a water-
insoluble fraction called amylopectin. These two
fractions appear to correspond to different
carbohydrates of high molecular weight and formula
(C
6
H
10
O
5
)
n
. Upon treatment with acid or under the
influence of enzymes, the components of starch are
hydrolyzed progressively to dextrin (a mixture of
low-molecular-weight polysaccharides), (+)-maltose,
and finally D-(+)-glucose. (A mixture of all these is
found in corn sirup, for example.) Both amylose and
amylopectin are made up of D-(+)-glucose units, but
differ in molecular size and shape.
Cellulose :
Cellulose is the chief component of wood and plant
fibers; cotton, for instance, is nearly pure cellulose. It
is insoluble in water and tasteless; it is a non-
reducing carbohydrate. These properties, in part at
least, are due to its extremely high molecular weight.
Cellulose has the formula (C
6
H
10
O
5
)
n
. Complete
hydrolysis by acid yields D-(+)-glucose as the only
monosaccharide. Hydrolysis of completely
methylated cellulose gives a high yield of 2, 3, 6-tri-
O-methyl-D-glucose. Like starch, therefore, cellulose
is made up of chains of D-glucose units, each unit
joined by a glycoside linkage to C4 of the next.
Cellulose differs from starch, however, in the
configuration of the glycoside linkage. Upon
treatment with acetic anhydride and sulfuric acid,
cellulose yields octa-O-acetylcellobiose.
Reactions of cellulose :
Like any alcohol, cellulose form esters. Treatment
with a mixture of nitric and sulfuric acid converts
cellulose into cellulose nitrate. The properties and
uses of the product depend upon the extent of
nitration.
In the presence of acetic anhydride, acetic acid, and a
little sulfuric acid, cellulose is converted into the
triacetate. Partial hydrolysis removes some of the
acetate groups, degrades the chains to smaller
fragments (of 200300 units each), and yields the
vastly important commercial cellulose acetate
(roughly a diacetate). Cellulose acetate is less
flammable than cellulose nitrate and has replaced the
nitrate in many of its applications, in safety-type
photographic film, for example. When a solution of
cellulose acetate in acetone is forced through the fine
holes of a spinnerette, the solvent evaporates and
leaves solid filaments. Threads from these filaments
make up the material known as acetate rayon.
Industrially, cellulose is alkylated to ethers by action
of alkyl chlorides (cheaper than sulfates) in the
presence of alkali. Considerable degradation of the
long chains is unavoidable in these reactions. Methyl,
ethyl, and benzyl ethers of cellulose are important in
the production of textiles, films, and various plastic
objects.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 36 JANUARY 2011
Inorganic
Chemistry
Fundamentals
















Identification of acidic radicals
For the identification of the acidic radicals, the
following scheme is followed.
Group I : The radicals which are analysed by dilute
H
2
SO
4
or dilute HCl. These are (i) carbonate (ii)
sulphite, (iii) sulphide, (iv) nitrite, and (v) acetate
Group II : The radicals which are analysed by
concentrated H
2
SO
4
. These are (i) chloride, (ii)
bromide, (iii) iodide (iv) nitrate, and (v) oxalate
Group III : The radicals which are not analysed by
dilute and concentrated H
2
SO
4
. These are (i)
sulphate, (ii) Phosphate, (iii) borate, and (iv) fluoride.
Group I :
Add dilute HCl or H
2
SO
4
to a small amount of
substance and warm gently, observe.
1. Carbonate or CO
3
2
:
The carbonates are decomposed with the
effervescence of carbon dioxide gas.
Na
2
CO
3
+ H
2
SO
4
Na
2
SO
4
+ H
2
O + CO
2

When this gas is passed through lime water, it
turns milky with the formation of calcium
carbonate.
Ca(OH)
2
+ CO
2
CaCO
3
+ H
2
O
Lime water White ppt.
If the CO
2
, gas is passed in excess, the milky
solution becomes colourless due to the formation
of soluble calcium bicarbonate.
CaCO
3
+ H
2
O + CO
2
Ca(HCO
3
)
2

White ppt. Soluble
Note :
Carbonates of bismuth and barium are not easily
decomposed by dilute H
2
SO
4
. Dilute HCl should
be used.
Sulphur dioxide evolved from sulphites also turns
lime water milky.
Ca(OH)
2
+ SO
2
CaSO
3
+ H
2
O
White ppt.
However SO
2
can be identified by its pungent
odour of burning sulphur.
PbCO
3
reacts with HCl or H
2
SO
4
to give in the
initial stage some effervescence but the reaction
slows down due to formation of a protective
insoluble layer of PbCl
2
or PbSO
4
on the surface
of remaining salt or mixture.
2. Sulphite :
The sulphites give out sulphur dioxide gas having
suffocating smell of burning sulphur.
CaSO
3
+ H
2
SO
4
CaSO
4
+ H
2
O + SO
2

When acidified potassium dichromate paper is
exposed to the gas, it attains green colour due to
the formation of chromic sulphate.
K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ H
2
SO
4
+ 3SO
2

K
2
SO
4
+ Cr
2
(SO
4
)
3
+ H
2
O
The sulphite also gives white precipitate with
BaCl
2
, Soluble in dil. HCl
Na
2
SO
3
+ BaCl
2
2 NaCl + BaSO
3

3. Sulphide, S
2
:
The sulphide salts form H
2
S which smells like
rotten eggs.
Na
2
S + H
2
SO
4
Na
2
SO
4
+ H
2
S
On exposure to this gas, the lead acetate paper
turns black due to the formation of lead sulphide.
Pb(CH
3
COO)
2
+ H
2
S PbS + 2CH
3
COOH
black ppt.
The sulphides also turn sodium nitroprusside
solution violet (use sodium carbonate extract for
this test).
Na
2
S + Na
2
[FeNO(CN)
5
]
Na
4
[Fe(NOS) (CN)
5
]
Sulphides of lead, calcium, nickel, cobalt,
antimony and stannic are not decomposed with
dilute H
2
SO
4
. Conc. HCl should be used for their
test.However brisk evolution of H
2
S takes place
even by use of dilute H
2
SO
4
if a pinch of zinc
dust is added.
Zn + H
2
SO
4
ZnSO
4
+ 2H
HgS + 2H Hg + H
2
S
4. Nitrite, NO
2


:
The nitrites yield a colourless nitric oxide gas
which in contact with oxygen of the air becomes
brown due to the formation of nitrogen dioxide.
2KNO
2
+ H
2
SO
4
`K
2
SO
4
+ 2HNO
2

Nitrous acid
3HNO
2
H
2
O + 2NO + HNO
3

2 NO + O
2
2NO
2

brown coloured gas

SALT ANALYSIS
KEY CONCEPT
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 37 JANUARY 2011
On passing the gas through dilute FeSO
4
solution,
brown coloured complex salt is formed.
FeSO
4
.7H
2
O + NO
[Fe(H
2
O)
5
NO].SO
4
+ 2H
2
O
Brown coloured
(panta aquo nitroso ferrous sulphate)
When a mixture of iodide and nitrite is treated
with dilute H
2
SO
4
, the iodides are decomposed
giving violet vapours of iodine, which turns
starch iodide paper blue.
2NaNO
2
+ H
2
SO
4
Na
2
SO
4
+ 2HNO
2

2KI + H
2
SO
4
K
2
SO
4
+ 2HI
2HNO
2
+ 2HI 2H
2
O + I
2
+ 2NO
Violet vapours
I
2
+ Starch Blue colour
5. Acetate :
Acetates decompose to give acetic acid vapours
having characteristic smell of vinegar.
2CH
3
COONa + H
2
SO
4

2CH
3
COOH + Na
2
SO
4

All acetates are soluble in water and their aqueous
solution on addition to neutral FeCl
3
solution
develops a blood red colour due to the formation
of ferric acetate.
FeCl
3
+ 3CH
3
COONa
(CH
3
COO)
3
Fe + 3NaCl
Blood Red colour
Acetates are also decomposed with oxalic acid
and give off acetic acid.
2CH
3
COONa + H
2
C
2
O
4

Na
2
C
2
O
4
+ 2CH
3
COOH
Note :
The ferric chloride solution supplied in the
laboratory is always acidic due to hydrolysis. It is
made neutral by the addition of dilute solution
of NH
4
OH drop by drop with constant stirring till
the precipitate formed does not dissolve. The
filtrate is called neutral ferric chloride solution.
Before testing acetate in the aqueous solution by
FeCl
3
, it must be made sure that the solution does
not contain
(i) CO
3
2
, (ii) SO
3
2

(iii) PO
4
3
, (iv) I



Since these also combine with Fe
+3
. Therefore ,
the test of acetate should be performed by neutral
ferric chloride solution only after the removal of
these ions by AgNO
3
solution.
Group II:
Add concentrated H
2
SO
4
to a small amount of the salt
or mixture and warm gently, observe.
1. Chloride Cl

:
Colourless pungent fumes of hydrogen chloride are
evolved.
NaCl + H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HCl
The gas evolved forms white fumes of ammonium
chloride with NH
4
OH.
NH
4
OH + HCl NH
4
Cl + H
2
O
White fumes
The gas evolved or solution of chloride salt forms
a curdy precipitate of silver chloride with silver
nitrate solution.
AgNO
3
+ HCl AgCl + HNO
3

Yellowish : green chlorine gas with suffocating
odour is evolved on addition of MnO
2
to the
above reaction mixture.
NaCl + H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HCl
MnO
2
+ 4HCl MnCl
2
+ 2H
2
O + Cl
2

Note :
The curdy precipitate of AgCl dissolves in
ammonium hydroxide forming a complex salt.
AgCl + 2NH
4
OH Ag(NH
3
)
2
Cl + 2H
2
O
The solution having the silver complex on
acidifying with dilute nitric acid gives again a
white precipitate of silver chloride.
Ag(NH
3
)
2
Cl + 2HNO
3
AgCl + 2NH
4
NO
3

Chromyl chloride Test : When solid chloride is
heated with conc. H
2
SO
4
in presence of K
2
Cr
2
O
7
,

deep red vapours of chromyl chloride are
evolved.
NaCl + H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HCl
K
2
Cr
2
O
7
+ 2H
2
SO
4
2KHSO
4
+ 2CrO
3
+ H
2
O
CrO
3
+ 2HCl CrO
2
Cl
2
+ H
2
O
Chromyl chloride
These vapours on passing through NaOH
solution, form the yellow solution due to the
formation of sodium chromate.
CrO
2
Cl
2
+ 4NaOH Na
2
CrO
4
+2NaCl+ 2H
2
O
Yellow colour
The yellow solution neutralised with acetic acid
gives a yellow precipitate of lead chromate with
lead acetate.
Na
2
CrO
4
+ Pb(CH
3
COO)
2

PbCrO
4
+ 2CH
3
COONa
Yellow ppt.
Note :
This test is not given by the chloride of mercuric,
tin, silver, lead and antimony.
The chromyl chloride test is always to be
performed in a dry test tube otherwise the
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 38 JANUARY 2011
chromyl chloride vapours will be hydrolysed in
the test tube.
CrO
2
Cl
2
+ 2H
2
O H
2
CrO
4
+ 2HCl
Bromides and iodides do not give this test.
2. Bromide, Br

:
Reddish- brown fumes of bromine are formed.
NaBr + H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HBr
2HBr + H
2
SO
4
Br
2
+ 2H
2
O + SO
2

More reddish brown fumes of bromine are
evolved when MnO
2
is added.
2NaBr + MnO
2
+ 3H
2
SO
4

2NaHSO
4
+ MnSO
4
+ 2H
2
O + Br
2

The aqueous solution of bromide or sodium
carbonate extract gives pale yellow precipitate of
silver bromide which partly dissolves in excess of
NH
4
OH forming a soluble complex.
NaBr + AgNO
3
AgBr + NaNO
3

Pale yellow ppt.
AgBr +2NH
4
OH Ag(NH
3
)
2
Br + 2H
2
O
3. Iodide, I

:
Violet vapours of iodine are evolved.
2KI + H
2
SO
4
2KHSO
4
+ 2HI
2 HI + H
2
SO
4
I
2
+ SO
2
+ 2H
2
O
Violet vapours with starch produce blue colour.
I
2
+ Starch Blue colour
More violet vapours are evolved when MnO
2
is
added.
2KI + MnO
2
+ 3H
2
SO
4

2KHSO
4
+ MnSO
4
+ 2H
2
O + I
2

Aqueous solution of the iodide or sodium
carbonate extract gives yellow precipitate of AgI
with silver nitrate solution which does not
dissolve in NH
4
OH.
NaI + AgNO
3
AgI + NaNO
3

Yellow ppt.
Note :
Sodium carbonate extract of bromide and iodide
on addition of CHCl
3
and chlorine water gives
brown or violet layer to CHCl
3
respectively.
2NaBr + Cl
2
2NaCl + Br
2

;
Br
2
+ CHCl
3
Brown
2NaI + Cl
2
2NaCl + I
2
;
I
2
+ CHCl
3
Violet
Excess of chlorine water should be avoided as the
layer may become colour less due to conversion
of Br
2
into HBrO and I
2
into HIO
3
.
Br
2
+ 2H
2
O + Cl
2
2HBrO + 2HCl
I
2
+ 5Cl
2
+ 6H
2
O 2HIO
3
+ 10 HCl
4. Nitrate, NO
3

:
Light brown fumes of nitrogen dioxide are
evolved.
NaNO
3
+ H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HNO
3

4 HNO
3
2H
2
O + 4 NO
2
+ O
2

These fumes intensify when copper turnings are
added.
Cu + 4HNO
3
Cu(NO
3
)
2
+ 2NO
2
+ 2H
2
O
Ring Test : An aqueous solution of salt is mixed
with freshly prepared FeSO
4
solution and conc.
H
2
SO
4
is poured in test tube from sides, a brown
ring is formed on account of the formation of a
complex at the junction of two liquids.
NaNO
3
+ H
2
SO
4
NaHSO
4
+ HNO
3

6 FeSO
4
+ 2HNO
3
+ 3H
2
SO
4

3Fe
2
(SO
4
)
3
+ 4H
2
O + 2NO
[Fe(H
2
O)
6
]SO
4
. H
2
O + NO
Ferrous sulphate
[Fe(H
2
O)
5
NO]SO
4
+ 2H
2
O
Brown ring
The nitratess can also be tested by boiling nitrate
with Zn or Al in presence of concentrated NaOH
solution when ammonia is evolved which can be
detected by the characteristics odour.
Zn + 2NaOH Na
2
ZnO
2
+ 2H
Al + NaOH + H
2
O NaAlO
2
+ 3H
NaNO
3
+ 8H NaOH + 2H
2
O + NH
3

Note : Ring test is not reliable in presence of
nitrite, bromide and iodide.
5. Oxalate, C
2
O
4
2
:
A mixture of CO and CO
2
is given off. The CO
burns with blue flame.
Na
2
C
2
O
4
+ H
2
SO
4
Na
2
SO
4
+ H
2
C
2
O
4

H
2
C
2
O
4
+ [H
2
SO
4
]

CO + CO
2
+ H
2
O + [H
2
SO
4
]
2CO + O
2
2CO
2
A solution of oxalates give the white precipitate
with CaCl
2
solution. This precipitate get dissolved
in dil. H
2
SO
4
and decolourises KMnO
4
(acidified)
solution.
Na
2
C
2
O
4
+ CaCl
2
CaC
2
O
4
+ 2NaCl
CaC
2
O
4
+ H
2
SO
4
CaSO
4
+ H
2
C
2
O
4

5H
2
C
2
O
4
+ 2KMnO
4
+ 3H
2
SO
4

2 MnSO
4
+ K
2
SO
4
+ 8 H
2
O + 10CO
2

Group III :
1. Sulphate ,SO
4
2
:
Add conc. HNO
3
to a small amount of substance or
take sodium carbonate extract and then add BaCl
2

solution. A white precipitate of BaSO
4
insoluble in
conc. acid is obtained.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 39 JANUARY 2011
Na
2
SO
4
+ BaCl
2
2NaCl + BaSO
4

White ppt.
Note : Silver and lead if present, may be precipitated
as silver chloride and lead chloride by the addition of
barium chloride. To avoid it, barium nitrate may be
used in place of barium chloride.
2. Borate :
To a small quantity of the substance (salt or mixture),
add few ml. of ethyl alcohol and conc. H
2
SO
4
. Stir
the contents with a glass rod. Heat the test tube and
bring the mouth of the test tube near the flame. The
formation of green edged flame indicates the
presence of borate.
2Na
3
BO
3
+ 3H
2
SO
4
3Na
2
SO
4
+ 2H
3
BO
3

H
3
BO
3
+ 3C
2
H
5
OH (C
2
H
5
)
3
BO
3
+ 3H
2
O
Ethyl borate
3. Phosphate :
Add conc. HNO
3
to a small amount of substance or
take sodium carbonate extract, heat and then add
ammonium molybdate. A canary yellow precipitate
of ammonium phospho molybdate is formed.
Ca
3
(PO
4
)
2
+ 6HNO
3
3Ca (NO
3
)
2
+ 2H
3
PO
4

H
3
PO
4
+ 12 (NH
4
)
2
MoO
4
+ 21 HNO
3

(NH
4
)
3
PO
4
. 12 MoO
3
+ 21 NH
4
NO
3
+ 12 H
2
O
Canary yellow ppt.
Note :
Arsenic also yields a yellow precipitate of
(NH
4
)
3
. AsO
4
.12 MoO
3
(Ammonium arseno
molybdate).Thus in presence of As, phosphate is
tested in the filtrate of second group.
The precipitate of ammonium phosphomolybdate
dissolves in excess of phosphate. Thus, the
reagent (ammonium molybdate) should always be
added in excess.
HCl interferes in this test. Hence, before the test
of phosphate is to be performed, the solution
should be boiled to remove HCl.
Reducing agents such as sulphites, sulphides, etc.,
interfere as they reduce Mo
+6

to molybdenum
blue (Mo
3
O
8
.
xH
2
O). The solution, therefore, turns
blue. In such cases, the solutions should be boiled
with HNO
3
so as to oxidise them before the
addition of ammonium molybdate.
4. Fluoride :
Take small amount of the substance in dry test tube
and add an equal amount of sand and conc.
H
2
SO
4
.Heat the contents and place a glass rod
moistened with water over the mouth of the test tube.
A gelatinous waxy white deposit on the rod is
formed.
2NaF + H
2
SO
4
Na
2
SO
4
+ H
2
F
2

SiO
2
+ 2H
2
F
2
SiF
4
+ 2H
2
O
3SiF
4
+ 4H
2
O H
4
SiO
4
+ 2H
2
SiF
6

Silicic acid (white)
Note :
The test should be performed in perfectly dry test
tube otherwise waxy white deposit will not be
formed on the rod.
HgCl
2
and NH
4
Cl also give white deposits under
these conditions, but these are crystalline in
nature.
Sodium carbonate extract :
One part of the given substance is mixed with
about 3 parts of sodium carbonate and nearly 10
to 15 ml. of distilled water. The contents are then
heated for 10-15 minutes and filtered. The filtrate
is known as sodium carbonate extract or soda
extract and this contains soluble sodium salts due
to exchange of partners in between sodium
carbonate and salts.
CaCl
2
+ Na
2
CO
3
CaCO
3
+ 2NaCl
Insoluble Sodium chloride
(soluble)
PbSO
4
+ Na
2
CO
3
PbCO
3
+ Na
2
SO
4

Insoluble Sodium sulphate
(Soluble)
BaCl
2
+ Na
2
CO
3
BaCO
3
+ 2 NaCl
Insoluble Sodium chloride
(Soluble)
The carbonates of the cations of the mixtures are
mostly insoluble in water and are obtained in the
residue. On the other hand, sodium salts of the
anions (acidic radicals) of the mixture being
soluble in water are obtained in the filtrate.
The sodium carbonate extract is basic in nature
and before it is used for the analysis of a
particular acidic radical, it is first neutralised by
the addition of small quantity of an appropriate
acid. The acid is added to the extract till the
effervescence cease to evolve.
Advantages of preparing sodium carbonate
extract-
The preparation of sodium carbonate extract
affords a convenient method for bringing the
anions of the mixture into solution which were
otherwise insoluble with cation of salt.
It removes the basic radicals (usually coloured)
which interferes in the usual tests of some of the
acidic radicals.
The residue can be used for the tests of basic
radicals of I to VI groups. Such a solution does
not involve the problem of removing interfering
radicals like oxalate, fluoride, borate and
phosphate.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 40 JANUARY 2011








1. A basic volatile, nitrogen compound gave a foul
smelling gas when treated with CHCl
3
and alcoholic
KOH. A 0.295 g sample of the substance dissolved in
aqueous HCl and treated with NaNO
2
solution at 0C
liberated a colourless; odourless gas whose volume
corresponds to 112 ml at STP. After the evolution of
the gas was complete, the aqueous solution was
distilled to give an organic liquid which did not
contain nitrogen and which on warming with alkali
and iodine gave yellow precipitate. Identify the
original substance. Assume it contains one N-atom
per molecule. [IIT-1993]
Sol. Clue 1. Nitrogen compound gave foul smelling gas
when treated with CHCl
3
and alc. KOH (carbylamine
reaction), thus it is a primary amine.
Clue 2. This compound when treated with HCl +
NaNO
2
solution (nitrous acid test) at 0C liberates
colourless and odourless gas.
C
n
H
2n+1
NH
2

+
2
NaNO HCl

Alcohol
ROH +
Nitrogen
2
N
At STP,
112 ml of N
2
is evolved from = 0.295 g C
n
H
2n+1
NH
2


22400 ml of N
2
is evolved from
=
112
22400 295 . 0
= 59 g C
n
H
2n+1
NH
2

C
n
H
2n+1
NH
2
= 59
or n C + (2n + 1) H + N + 2 H = 59
or 12n + 2n + 1 + 14 + 2 1 = 59
or n =
14
42
= 3
Thus the molecular formula of nitrogen compound is
C
3
H
7
NH
2
.
Clue 3. Alcohol obtained gives iodoform test
positive, thus it is a secondary alcohol and its
structure should be

CH
3
CHCH
3

OH
2-propanol

and hence the structure of (A) should be

CH
3
CHCH
3

NH
2
Propan-2-amine

2. An organic compound A, C
8
H
4
O
3
, in dry benzene in
the presence of anhydrous AlCl
3
gives compound B.
The compound B on treatment with PCl
5
followed by
reaction with H
2
/Pd(BaSO
4
) gives compound C,
which on reaction with hydrazine gives a cyclised
compound D(C
14
H
10
N
2
). Identify A, B, C and D.
Explain the formation of D from C. [IIT-2000]
Sol. The given reactions are as follows.


O
O +
O
AlCl3
O
O
OH
PCl5
H2/Pd (BaSO4)
C
6
H
5
H
C
C
O
O
H2NNH2
C
6
H
5
N

N


The formation of D from C may be explained as
follows.


C
6
H
5
C
6
H
5
O
O
NH
2
NH
2
O

NH
2

NH
2

O

+

+

C
6
H
5
O

N H
N H
OH
C
6
H
5
N
N

3. An organic compound (X), C
5
H
8
O, does not react
appreciably with Lucas reagent at room temperatures
but gives a precipitate with ammonical AgNO
3

solution. With excess CH
3
MgBr; 0.42 g of (X) gives
224 ml of CH
4
at STP. Treatment of (X) with H
2
in
the presence of Pt catalyst followed by boiling with
excess HI gives n-pentane. Suggest structure of (X)
and write the equations involved. [IIT-1992]
Sol. Lucas test sensitive test for the distinction of p, s, and
t-alcohol. A t-alcohol gives cloudiness immediately,
while s-alcohol within 5 minutes. A p-alcohol does
not react with the reagent at room temperature. Thus,
the present compound (X) does not react with this
reagent, hence it is a p-alcohol.
UNDERSTANDING
Organic Chemistry
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 41 JANUARY 2011
(X) = C
4
H
6
.CH
2
OH(p-alcohol)
Since the compound gives a ppt. with ammonical
AgNO
3
, hence it is an alkyne containing one
C CH, thus (X) may be written as :
HCC C
2
H
4
CH
2
OH (X)
It is given that 0.42 g of the compound (which is
0.005 mol) produces 22.4 ml of CH
4
at STP (which is
0.01 mol) with excess of CH
3
MgBr. This shows that
the compound (X) contains two active H atoms (H
atom attached to O, S, N and CCH is called
active). Of these, one is due to the p-alcoholic group
(CH
2
OH) and the other is due to the CCH bond,
since both these groups are present in (X), hence it
evolves two moles of CH
4
on reaction with
CH
3
MgBr.
H CC.
) X (
4 2
H C CH
2
OH + 2CH
3
MgBr
BrMgCCC
2
H
4
CH
2
OMgBr + 2CH
4

Moreover, the treatment of (X) with H
2
/Pt followed
by boiling with excess of HI gives n-pentane
(remember that 2HI are required to convert one
CH
2
OH into CH
3
). This shows that the compound
(X) contains a straight chain of five carbon atoms.
H CCC
2
H
4
CH
2
OH
Pt / H 2
2

CH
3
CH
2
.C
2
H
4
CH
2
OH


HI 2
CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
3
+ H
2
O + I
2

n-pentane
On the basis of abvoe analytical facts (X) has the
structure :

HCC.CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
OH (X)
5 4 3 2 1
4-pentyne-1-ol

The different equations of (X) are :

) X (
2 2 2
OH CH CH CH C C H
. temp Room
HCl ZnCl
2

+
No reaction

AgNO
3

Ag CC CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
OH + NH
4
NO
3
White ppt.
NH
3
2CH
3
MgBr
Br MgCC.CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
OMgBr + 2CH
4

2H
2
/Pt
CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
OH
Pentanol-1
CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
3

n-pentane
2 HI
, H
2
O; I
2


The production of 2 moles of CH
4
is confirmed as the
reactions give 224 ml of CH
4
.
Q 84 g(X) gives = 2 22.4 litre CH
4

0.42 g (X) gives =
84
42 . 0 4 . 22 2

= 224 ml of CH
4


4. Outline the accepted mechanism of the following
reaction. Show the various steps including the
charged intermediates.


+ CH
3
CCl
||
O

3
AlCl
CCH
3
+HCl
||
O


Sol. Ozonolysis of (A) to acetone and an aldehyde
indicates the following part structure of alkene (A) :
C=CHR
CH
3
CH
3
Alkene (A)

3
O


C=O + OCH.R
CH
3

CH
3
aldehyde
acetone

As per problem :
RCHO
] O [
RCOOH [B]
2
Br / P

Bromo compound [C]
O H
2
Hydroxy acid [D]
Structure of (D) is determined by the reaction :
C = O
CH
3
CH
3


HCN
C
CH
3
CH
3
OH
CN


+
H / O H
2

C
CH
3
CH
3
OH
COOH

(D)
The compound (D) is obtained by hydrolysis of (C)
with aqueous alkali since (C) is a bromo compound,
therefore it has a bromo group where the compound
(D) has a hydroxyl group. Therefore, structure of C is
C
CH
3
CH
3
Br
COOH

The compound (C) is formed by bromination of
compound (B), therefore, the compound (B) is
C
CH
3
CH
3
H
COOH

The compound (B) is formed by oxidation of an
aldehyde therefore the structure of the aldehyde is
C
CH
3
CH
3
H
CHO

The aldehyde and acetone are formed by ozonolysis
of alkene. Therefore, the double bond in alkene
should be between the carbon atoms of the two
carbonyl compounds (the aldehyde and acetone).
Therefore, the compounds and the reactions are
identified as
CC=C
CH
3
CH
3
CH
3
CHO | |
H H
(A)


ozonolysis
C
CH
3
CH
3
H
CHO

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 42 JANUARY 2011
+ O =

C
CH
3
CH
3


C
CH
3
CH
3
H
CHO


] O [
C
CH
3
CH
3
H
COOH



P / Br
2
C
CH
3
CH
3
Br
COOH


hydrolysis


C
CH
3
CH
3
OH
COOH
(D)


5. A hydrocarbon (A) of the formula C
8
H
10
, on
ozonolysis gives compound (B), C
4
H
6
O
2
, only. The
compound (B) can also be obtained from the alkyl
bromide, (C) (C
3
H
4
Br) upon treatment with Mg in
dry ether, followed by treatment with CO
2
and
acidification. Identify (A), (B) and (C) and also
equations for the reactions.
Sol. A(C
8
H
10
)
O H ) ii (
O ) i (
2
3

) B (
2 6 4
O H C
Since compound (A) adds one mol of O
3
, hence it
should have either

C = C or a C C bond.
If it was alkene its formula should be C
8
H
16
(C
n
H
2n
),
and if it was alkyne it should have the formula C
8
H
14
;
it means it is neither a simple alkenen or simple
alkyne. However it is definite that the compound has
an unsaturated group, it appears that it is a
cyclosubstituted ethyne.
H C C H
10 6
H C
H 2
+

C
3
H
5
C C C
3
H
5

the C
3
H
5
corresponds to cyclopropyl () radical,
hence compund (A) is

CH CC CH
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
1,2-dicyclopropyl ethyne

The ozonolysis of above compound would give two
moles of cyclopropane carboxylic acid (C
4
H
6
O
2
).


CH CC CH
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
(A)
(i) O3



CH C C CH
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
(A)
H2O
O

O

O

Warm



CH C C CH
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
O

O

(B)
+ H
2
O
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH COOH

2


Compound (B) is prepared from cyclopropyl bromide
as follows :


CH Br
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
Cyclopropyl
magnesium bromide
CH . MgBr

Mg
ether
C=O

O



CH .COOMgBr
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
Addition compound
CHCOOH

HOH
dil. HCl;
MgBrOH
















































Ozone-layer Healing Itself
The ozone-layer is showing signs of recoring, but it
is unlikely to stabilise at pre-1980 levels. The
depletion of the earth's protective ozone-layer is
caused by the chemical action of chlorine and
bromine released by man-made chlorofluorocarbons
(CFCs), which are used in aerosol sprays and
cooling equipments.
Ozone-depleting chemicals were banned by the
1987 Montreal Protocol which has now been
ratified by 180 nations. Ozone-layer is getting better
due to Montreal Protocol.
Dr. Weatherhead and Dr. Signe Bech Anderson of
the Danish Meteorological Institute in Copenhagen
analysed data from satellites and ground stations
and information from 14 modelling studies. They
found that ozone levels have stabilised or increased
slightly in the last 10 years. The full recovery is still
decades away.

Process of Ozone-layer Healing
The research team leader Dr. S. B. Anderson said,
"The depletion has been most severe at the poles
and to a lesser extent at mid-latitudes covering
bands of North America, South America and
Europe." Shifting temperatrues, green house gases,
nitrous oxide and atmospheric dynamics, which can
influence ozone-levels, are going to change inthe
future. Volcanic activities on the Earth can also
have an impact. The 1993 Mount Pinatubo eruption
in the Phillippines caLI sed ozone-levels to
backslide for several years.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 43 JANUARY 2011






















1. Given that (x) =
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
c a b x
c x b x


f(a) +

) ( ) (
) ( ) (
a b c b
a x c x


f (b)+
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
b c a c
b x a x


f (c) f (x)
where a < c < b and f '' (x) exists at all points in
(a, b). Prove that there exists a number ,
a < < b , such that

) ( ) (
) (
c a b a
a f

+
) ( ) (
) (
a b c b
b f

+
) ( ) (
) (
b c a c
c f


=
2
1
f '' ().

2. An unbiased die is tossed until it lands the same way
up twice running. Find the probability that it requires
r tosses.

3. Given the base of a triangle and the sum of its sides
prove that the locus of the centre of its incircle is an
ellipse.

4. Let f (x) = ax
2
+ bx + c & g (x) = cx
2
+ bx + a, such
that | f (0) | 1, | f (1) | 1 and |f (1) | 1 , prove that
| f (x) | 5/4 and | g (x) | 2.

5. In order to find the dip of an oil bed below the
surface of the ground, vertical borings are made from
the angular points, A, B, C of a triangle ABC which is
in horizontal plane. The depth of the bed at these
points are found to be x, x + y and x + z respectively.
Show that the dip (angle with horizontal) of the oil
bed which is assumed to be a plane is given by tan .
sin A = A
bc
yz
b
z
c
y
cos
2
2
2
2
2
+ where b and c are the
lengths of the sides CA and AB respectively and A is
the angle between CA and AB.

6. Evaluate :

x
x x
5 cos 2 1
7 cos 8 cos


7. Let f (x) be an even function such that f (x) is
continuous, find y for which
2
2
dx
y d
=

x
x
dt t f ) (

8. Prove the inequality (a

+ b

)
1/
< (a

+ b

)
1/
,
for a > 0, b > 0 & > > 0.

9. A circle of radius 1 rolls (without sliding) along
the x-axis so that its centre is of the form (t, 1)
with t increasing. A certain point P touches the
x-axis at the origin as the circle rolls. As the circle
rolls further, the point P passes through the point
(x, 1/2). Find x, when it passes through (x, 1/2)
first time.

10. Find all positive integers n for which
1 n + 1 + n is rational.





`t{xt|vt V{txzx
This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing
IIT JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and
we hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Shailendra Maheshwari
Joint Director Academics, Career Point, Kota Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
9
Set

SCIENCE TIPS


An electron is moving along X-axis in a magnetic
field acting along Y-axis. What is the direction of
magnetic force acting on it. Along Z-axis
What is the equation of a plane progressive simple
harmonic wave traverlling in + x direction?
y = a sin

2
(vt x) = a sin 2 |
.
|

\
|

x
T
t

What type of magnetic material is used in making
permanent magnets? Ferromagnetic
A wire kept along north-south is allowed to fall
freely. Will an induced emf be set up? No
Which of A.C. or D.C. is blocked by a capacitor?
D.C.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 44 JANUARY 2011












1.

A
B
C
d
a
d
b
c

Plane through mid pt of AB, to CD is
( r
r
1/2 ( a
r
+ b
r
)).( c
r
d
r
) = 0; Let centroid

4
d c b a
r
r
r
r
+ + +
= 0 at origin
( r
r
+ 1/2 ( c
r
+ d
r
)). ( c
r
d
r
) = 0
| r
r
+ c
r
|
2
= | r
r
+ d
r
|
2

it is the locus of pt. equidistance from c
r
& d
r

similarly.
| r
r
+ c
r
|
2
= | r
r
+ d
r
|
2
= | r
r
+ a
r
|
2
= | r
r
+ b
r
|
2

so the pt. is equidistant from a
r
, b
r
, c
r
, d
r

(i.e. circumcentre of tetrahedron a
r
, b
r
, c
r
, d
r
)

2. As the function is symmetrical about x = a & x = b
lines
so f (a + x) = f (a x) ................(1) &
f (b + x ) = f (b x) ................(2)
As it is defined for x R.
Let x = b a t in (1)
f (b t) = f (2a b + t)
use (2) in it
f (b + t) = f (2a 2b + b + t)
so the function is periodic & its possible period
may be |2a 2b| = 2b 2a (as b > a).

3. If A is the area of the triangle with sides a, b and c,
then A
2
= s (s a) (s b) (s c) ;
where 2s = a + b + c.
using AM - GM inequality for s a, s b, s c, we
have
A
2

s
3
3
) ( ) ( ) (
)
`

+ + c s b s a s

A
2
s
3
3
2 3
|
.
|

\
| s s
=
3
4
3
s
A
3 3
2
s

Let 2s = p , then A
3 12
2
p

A
max
=
3 12
2
p
, As condition of equality holds iff
s a = s b = s c which happen if a = b = c.
so A
max
=
3 12
2
p
; for a = b = c
Now again p A 3 12
p
min
= A 3 12 , and
again equality holds if a = b = c.

4. ac b 4
2
| b |
2
4
1
b
ac
| b |
2
4
1
b
ac
+
| b |
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
2
1
b
ac

so ac b 4
2
| b | +
b
ac 2

so that
a
ac b
a
b
2
4
2
2


a
b
2
+
a
b
2
+
b
c

=
a
b
+
b
c

MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES

SOLUTION FOR DECEMBER ISSUE (SET # 8)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 45 JANUARY 2011
Hence the solutions of az
2
+ bz + c = 0 satisfy
condition | z | +
a
b
+
b
c
.

5. P (a cos , b sin )
Equation of AC
a
x
cos +
b
y
sin = 1
A
B
C
D
P()

Point A : (0 , b cosec )
Equation of BC y = b
Point C =
a
x
cos sin = 1
x =

+
cos
) sin 1 ( a

Point C |
.
|

\
|

+
b
a
,
cos
) sin 1 (

Area A =
2
1
AD . BC = AD . DC
= |
.
|

\
|

+
sin
b
b .

+
cos
) sin 1 ( a

=

+
cos sin
) sin 1 (
2
ab

A = ab

+
cos sin
) sin 1 (
2


d
dA
=
ab .

+ +
2 2
2 2 2 2
cos sin
) sin (cos ) sin 1 ( sin cos ) sin 1 ( 2

=

+
2 2
cos sin
) sin 1 ( ab
[2cos
2
sin (1 + sin) cos
2

+ (1 + sin) sin
3
)]
=

+
2 2
cos sin
) sin 1 ( ab

[ cos
2
+ sin
2
+ sin
3
+ cos
2
sin]
for max./min .
d
dA
= 0
sin (cos
2
+ sin
2
) + sin
2
cos
2
= 0
sin + sin
2
(1 sin
2
) = 0
2sin
2
+ sin 1 = 0
(2 sin 1) (sin + 1) = 0
as sin 1
sin = 1/2 ; = /6
when > /6 ;
d
dA
> 0
when < /6 ;
d
dA
< 0
so =
6

; is the pt of min.
min. area.
A
min
=

+
cos sin
) sin 1 (
2
ab

=
2 / 3 . 2 / 1
) 2 / 1 1 ( .
2
+ ab
=
2
3
.
2
1
. 4
9 ab

= 3 3 ab sq. units.

6. ax
2
+ 2hxy + by
2
= 0; (y M
1
x) (y M
2
x) = 0
where M
1
+ M
2
=
b
h 2
& M
1
M
2
=
b
a

Now as given the second pair must be given by
(y M
1
x)(M
2
y + x) = 0
M
2
y
2
+ (1 M
1
M
2
)xy M
1
x
2
= 0
Compare it with ax
2
+ 2hxy + by
2
= 0

2
b
M
=
2
1
2 1
h
M M
=

1
a
M

so

2
b
M
=

1
a
M
=

2 1
a b
M M

+
=
) (
2
a b b
h


=
2
1
2 1
h
M M
=
2
/ 1
h
b a

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 46 JANUARY 2011
M
2
=
) (
2
a b b
hb

& M
1
=
b h
a a b
2
) (

Since M
1
M
2
=
b
a
so
) (
2
a b b
hb

.
b h
a a b
2
) (
=
b
a

Thus


a b
b ha

=
a b
ab h



7. LHS = coeff. of x
n
in [
n
C
0
(1 + x)
m
+
n
C
1
(1 + x)
m+1
+
.... +
n
C
n
(1 + x)
m + n
]
= coeff. of x
n
in (1 + x)
m
[
n
C
0
+
n
C
1
(1 + x) + ........
..... +
n
C
0
(1 + x)
n
]
= coeff. of x
n
in (1 + x)
m
(2 + x)
n

= coeff of x
n
in (1 + x)
m

n
r
r r n
r
n
x C
0
2 .
=
n
C
0
.
m
C
0
+
n
C
1
.
m
C
1
. 2 +
n
C
2
.
m
C
2
. 2
2
+ .... +
n
C
n
m
C
n
. 2
n


8. I
n
=

1
1
2
) 1 (
n
x cos mx dx
=
1
1
2
sin
) 1 (

m
mx
x
n
+

1
1
1 2
) 1 (
2
n
x x
m
n
sin mx dx
= 0 +
m
n 2

( )
(
(

+ + |
.
|

\
|

1
1
1 2 2 2 2
1
1
1
2
cos ) 1 ( ) 1 ( ) 1 ( 2 (
1 cos
1 ( dx mx x x x n
m n
mx
x x
n n
n

=
2
2
m
n

1
1
2 2
) 1 (
n
x | |
2 2
1 ) 2 2 ( x x n + + cosmx dx
=
2
2
m
n

1
1
2 2
) 1 (
n
x | | 1 ) 1 2 (
2
+ + x n cos mx dx
=
2
2
m
n

(
(

1
1
2 2
1
1
1 2
cos ) 1 ( ) 2 2 ( cos ) 1 ( ) 1 2 ( dx mx x n dx mx x n
n n
m
2
I
n
= (2n (2n 1) I
n1
4n (n 1) I
n2
.
Hence proved.

9. t
n
=
2
+
+
) 1 ( .
1 2
2
n n
n

=
2
1
n

2
) 1 (
1
+ n

S
n
= 1
2
2
1
+
2
2
1

2
3
1
+
2
3
1

2
4
1
.................
S
n
= 1
2
) 1 (
1
+ n

Required sum =
n
Lim S
n
= 1.

10. Let the given circle be x
2
+ y
2
= r
2
& parametric
angles of A, B, C are respectively
1
,
2
&
3
. Let the
slopes of the given two lines are m
1
& m
2
. Sides AB
& BC are parallel to these lines.
A(
1
)
C(
3
) B(
2
)

Equation of AB;
x cos
2
2 1
+
+ y sin
2
2 1
+
= r cos
2
2 1


so m
1
= cot
2
2 1
+
=
1
+
2
=
similarly : m
2
= cot
2
3 2
+
=
2
+
3
=
Here , are constants as m
1
& m
2
are constants.
Now equation of AC ;
x cos |
.
|

\
| +
2
3 1
+ y sin
2
3 1
+
= r cos
2
3 1


x cos |
.
|

\
| +
2
3 1
+ y sin
2
3 1
+
= rk
where k = cos
2

(i . e. constant)
so foot of the perpendicular from centre of given
circle on AC |
.
|

\
| + +
2
,
2
cos
3 1 3 1
k r k r is
which lies on x
2
+ y
2
= (rk)
2
.


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 47 JANUARY 2011











1. A traveller starts from a certain place on a certain day
and travels 1 km on the first day and on subsequent
days, he travels 2 km more than the previous day.
After 3 days, a second traveller sets out from the
same place and on his first day he travels 12 km and
on subsequent days he travels 1 km more than the
previous day. On how many days will the second
traveller be ahead of the first?
Sol. The first traveller travels on different days as follow
(in km) 1, 1 + 2, 1 + 2 + 2, ... .
After 3 days the first traveller is already ahead by
(1 + 3 + 5) km, i.e., 9 km.
1 3 5

The second traveller travels on different days as
follows : 0, 0, 0, 12, 13, 14, ...
After n days from the day the second traveller starts,
the distance covered by the first
= 1 + 3 + 5 + (7 + 9 + ... to n terms)
= 1 + 3 + 5 + ... to (n + 3) terms
= (n + 3)
2

and the distance covered by the second
= 12 + 13 + 14 + ... to n terms
=
2
n
{24 + (n 1).1} =
2
) 23 ( + n n

The second traveller is ahead of the first on the n
th

day (after the second sets off) if

2
) 23 ( + n n
> (n + 3)
2

or n
2
+ 23n > 2(n
2
+ 6n + 9)
or n
2
11n + 18 < 0
or (n 2) (n 9) < 0.
So n 2 > 0 and n 9 < 0 ...(i)
or n 2 < 0 and n 9 > 0 ...(ii)
(i) n > 2 and n < 9
(ii) n < 2 and n > 0 (absurd)
Thus, from the begining of the 3
rd
day to the end of
the 9
th
day the second traveller is ahead of the first.
So, the second is ahead of the first on the 3
rd
, 4
th
, 5
th
,
..., 9
th
days (after the second sets off).
Hence, the required number of days = 7.
2. If two lines cut the circle |z| = r at the points
representing the complex numbers a, b and c, d, and
they meet at the point z, prove that
z(a
1
b
1
c
1
d
1
) = a
1
+ b
1
c
1
d
1
.
Sol. Clearly |a| = |b| = |c| = |d| = r.
a a = b b = c c = d d = r
2
(Q |z|
2
= z z ).
Now a, b and z are collinear. Let they lie on the line
z + z + = 0, R.
z + z + = 0
a + a + = 0
b + b + = 0.
Eliminating , , we get
1
1
1
b b
a a
z z
= 0.
Similarly,
1
1
1
d d
c c
z z
= 0. On simplification,
) ( ) ( ) ( a b b a b a z b a z + = 0
and ) ( ) ( ) ( c b d c d c z d c z + = 0
By cross-multiplication,

) )( ( ) )( ( a b b a d c c d d c b a
z
+

=
) )( ( ) )( (
1
d c b a d c b a +

|
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
.
|

\
|
) ( ) (
2 2 2 2
d c
b
r
a
r
d
r
c
r
b a z
= (c d)
|
|
.
|

\
|
a
r
b
b
r
a
2 2
. (a b)
|
|
.
|

\
|
c
r
d
d
r
c
2 2
.
{Q a a = r
2
, etc.}
or
)
`

) .(

). ( d c
ab
a b
cd
c d
b a z
= (c d)
ab
b a
2 2

(a b)
cd
d c
2 2


or z(a b) (c d) |
.
|

\
|
+
ab cd
1 1

= (a b)(c d)
)
`

+ +
cd
d c
ab
b a

z(a
1
b
1
c
1
d
1
) = a
1
+ b
1
c
1
d
1

{Q a b, c d}.
Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students' Forum
MATHS
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 48 JANUARY 2011
3. If
a

4
sin
+
b

4
cos
=
b a +
1
, show that

3
8
sin
a

+
3
8
cos
b

=
3
) (
1
b a +
.
Sol. Here
a
b a +
sin
4
+
b
b a +
cos
4
= 1
or sin
4
+ cos
4
+
a
b
sin
4
+
b
a
cos
4
= 1
or (sin
2
+ cos
2
)
2
2 sin
2
. cos
2

+
a
b
sin
4
+
b
a
cos
4
= 1
or
2
2
sin
|
|
.
|

\
|

a
b
2 .
a
b
sin
2
.
b
a
cos
2

+
2
2
cos
|
|
.
|

\
|

b
a
= 0
or
2
2 2
cos sin
|
|
.
|

\
|

b
a
a
b
= 0

a
b
sin
2
=
b
a
cos
2

or sin
2
=
b
a
cos
2


a

2
sin
=
b

2
cos
=
b a +
+
2 2
cos sin

sin
2
=
b a
a
+
, cos
2
=
b a
b
+


3
8
sin
a

+
3
8
cos
b

=
3
1
a
.
4
4
) ( b a
a
+
+
3
1
b
.
4
4
) ( b a
b
+

=
4
) ( b a
a
+
+
4
) ( b a
b
+

=
4
) ( b a
b a
+
+
=
3
) (
1
b a +


4. In the ABC, a similar A'B'C' is inscribed so that
B'C' = . BC. If B'C' is inclined at an angle with
BC, prove that cos =
2
1
.
Sol. ABC and A'B'C' are similar where
B'A'C' = BAC = A, A'B'C' = ABC = B,
B'C'A' = BCA = C.

A
B'
C
A' B O
C'
C
B
A


In AC'B', AB'C' = B'OC + ACB = + C

) sin(
'
C
AC
+
=
A
C B
sin
' '

or
) sin(
'
C
AC
+
=
A
BC
sin

= .
A
a
sin
= 2R.
In BA'C', BA'C' = A'C'B' A'OC' = C

) sin(
'
C
BC
=
B
C A
sin
' '


) sin(
'
C
BC
=
B
AC
sin
.
=
B
b
sin

= 2R

)
`

= = triangles similar from


AC
C A
BC
C B ' ' ' '
Q
Thus, we get
AC' = 2R sin ( + C) and BC' = 2R sin(C )
c = AB = AC' + BC' = 2R {sin(C + )
+ sin (C )}
= 2R . 2sin C . cos
cos =
C R
c
sin 4
=
R 4
1
.
C
c
sin

=
R 4
1
. 2R =
2
1

cos =
2
1
.

5. A ray of light is sent along the line x 2y 3 = 0. On
reaching the line 3x 2y 5 = 0 the ray is reflected
from it. Find the equation of the line containing the
reflected ray.
Sol. Let A be the point of incidence.
A is the point of intersection of
x 2y 3 = 0 an d 3x 2y 5 = 0.
Solving these, we get x = 1, y = 1. So A = (1, 1).
x 2y3=0
P
Q
A 3x 2y5=0

Let P be any point on the line of incidence
x 2y 3 = 0.
So, we take P = (3, 0). Let Q be the image of P by the
line 3x 2y 5 = 0.
Let Q = (, ). Clearly PQ the line 3x 2y 5 = 0
and the middle point of PQ is on 3x 2y 5 = 0.

3
0

.
2
3
= 1 ...(i)
and 3 .
2
3 +
2 .
2
0 +
5 = 0 ...(ii)
(i) 3 + 2( 3) = 0
or 2 + 3 6 = 0 ...(iii)
(ii) 3( + 3) 2 10 = 0
or 3 2 1 = 0. ...(iv)

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 49 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 50 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 51 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 52 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 53 JANUARY 2011
Solving (iii) and (iv),
12 3

=
2 18 +

=
9 4
1


15

=
16

=
13
1
; =
13
15
, =
13
16
.
Q = |
.
|

\
|
13
16
,
13
15
.
The line containing the reflected ray is the joining the
points A(1, 1) and Q |
.
|

\
|
13
16
,
13
15
.
The required equation is y + 1 =
1
13
15
1
13
16
+
(x 1)
or y + 1 =
2
29
(x 1)
or 2y + 2 = 29x 29 ; 29x 2y 31 = 0.

6. Prove that the angle subtended by any chord of a
rectangular hyperbola at the centre is the supplement
of the angle between the tangents at the ends of the
chord.
Sol. Let P(x
1
, y
1
) and Q(x
2
, y
2
) be two ends of a chord of
the rectangular hyperbola
x
2
y
2
= 1 ...(i)
R
Q
P
O

Now, 'm' of OP =
1
1
x
y

'm' of OQ =
2
2
x
y

tan =
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
. 1

x
y
x
y
x
y
x
y
+
=
2 1 2 1
2 1 1 2

y y x x
y x y x
+
,
where POQ = .
The equation of tangents at P and Q are
xx
1
yy
1
= 1 and xx
2
yy
2
= 1.
Their slopes are
1
1
y
x
and
2
2
y
x
.
tan =
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
. 1

y
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
+
=
2 1 2 1
1 2 2 1

x x y y
y x y x
+

tan and tan are equal in magnitude but
opposite in sign
tan = tan = tan ( )
+ = .


































Puzzle : Marble Mix Up


Years ago, to puzzle his friends, a scientist gave
one of four containers containing blue and/or
yellow marbles to each of the friends; Tom,
Dick, Harry, and Sally.

There were 3 marbles in each container, and the
number of blue marbles was different in each
one. There was a piece of paper in each
container telling which color marbles were in
that container, but the papers had been mixed
up and were ALL in the wrong containers.

He then told all of his friends to take 2 marbles
out of their container, read the label, and then
tell him the color of the third marble.

So Tom took two blue marbles out of his
container and looked at the label. He was able
to tell the color of the third marble
immediately.

Dick took 1 blue marble and 1 yellow marble
from his container. After looking at his label he
was able to tell the color of his remaining
marble.

Harry took 2 yellow marbles from his
container. He looked at the label in his
container, but could not tell what color the
remaining marble was.

Sally, without even looking at her marbles or
her label, was able to tell the scientist what
color her marbles were. Can you tell what color
marbles Sally had? Can you also tell what color
marbles the others had, and what label was in
each of their containers?
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 54 JANUARY 2011















Differential Equation :
An equation involving independent variable x,
dependent variable y and the differential coefficients
dx
dy
,
2
2
dx
y d
, .... is called differential equation.
Examples :
(1)
dx
dy
= 1 + x + y
(2)
dx
dy
+ xy = cot x
(3)
3
4
4
|
|
.
|

\
|
dx
y d
4
dx
dy
+ 4y = 5 cos 3x
(4) x
2
2
2
dx
y d
+
2
1 |
.
|

\
|
+
dx
dy
= 0
Order of a Differential Equation :
The order of a differential equation is the order of the
highest derivative occurring in the differential
equation. For example, the order of above differential
equations are 1, 1, 4 and 2 respectively.
Degree of a Differential Equation :
The degree of the differential equation is the degree
of the highest derivative when differential
coefficients are free from radical and fraction. For
example, the degree of above differential equations
are 1, 1, 3 and 2 respectively.
Linear and Non-linear Differential Equation :
A differential equation in which the dependent
variable and its differential coefficients occurs only
in the first degree and are not multiplied together is
called a linear differential equation. The general and
n
th
order differential equation is given below :
a
0
(x)
n
n
dx
y d
+ a
1
(x)
1
1

n
n
dx
y d
+ .... + a
n 1
dx
dy

+ a
n
(x)y + (x) = 0
Those equations which are not linear are called non-
linear differential equations.
Formation of Differential Equation :
(1) Write down the given equation.
(2) Differentiate it successively with respect to x that
number of times equal to the arbitrary constants.
(3) And hence on eliminating arbitrary constants
results a differential equation which involves x, y,
dx
dy
,
2
2
dx
y d
.....
Solution of Differential Equation :
A solution of a differential equation is any function
which when put into the equation changes it into an
identity.
General and particular solution :
The solution which contains a number of arbitrary
constant equal to the order of the equation is called
general solution by giving particular values to the
constants are called particular solutions.
Several Types of Differential Equations and their
Solution :
(1) Solution of differential equation

dx
dy
= f(x) is y =

+ c dx x f ) (
(2) Solution of differential equation

dx
dy
= f(x) g(y) is

) ( y g
dy
=

+ c dx x f ) (
(3) Solution of diff. equation
dx
dy
= f(ax + by + c) by
putting ax + by + c = v and
dx
dy
= |
.
|

\
|
a
dx
dv
b
1


) (v bf a
dv
+
= dx
Thus solution is by integrating

+ ) (v bf a
dv
=

dx

DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 55 JANUARY 2011
(4) To solve the homogeneous differential equation
dx
dy
=
) , (
) , (
y x g
y x f
, substitute y = vx and so

dx
dy
= v + x
dx
dv
.
Thus v + x
dx
dv
= f(v)

x
dx
=
v v f
dv
) (

Therefore solution is

x
dx
=

v v f
dv
) (
+ c
Equation reducible to homogeneous form :
A differential equation of the form

dx
dy
=
2 2 2
1 1 1
c y b x a
c y b x a
+ +
+ +
,
where
2
1
a
a

2
1
b
b
, can be reduced to homogeneous
form by adopting the following procedure :
Put x = X + h, y = Y + k,
so that
dX
dY
=
dx
dy

The equation then transformed to

dX
dY
=
) (
) (
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
c k b h a Y b X a
c k b h a Y b X a
+ + + +
+ + + +

Now choose h and k such that a
1
h + b
1
k + c
1
= 0 and
a
2
h + b
2
k + c
2
= 0. Then for these values of h and k,
the equation becomes

dX
dY
=
Y b X a
Y b X a
2 2
1 1
+
+

This is a homogeneous equation which can be solved
by putting Y = vX and then Y and X should be
replaced by y k and x h.
Special case :
If
dx
dy
=
c y b x a
c by ax
+ +
+ +
and
a
a
=
b
b
= m (say), i.e.
when coefficient of x and y in numerator and
denominator are proportional, then the above
equation cannot be solved by the discussed before
because the values of h and k given by the equations
will be indeterminate.
In order to solve such equations, we proceed as
explained in the following example.
Solve
dx
dy
=
4 3
7 6 2
+
+
y x
y x
=
4 3
7 ) 3 ( 2
+
+
y x
y x


)
`

= = 2
b
b
a
a
obviously
Put x 3y = v
1 3
dx
dy
=
dx
dv
(Now proceed yourself)

Solution of the linear differential equation :

dx
dy
+ Py = Q, where P and Q are either constants or
functions of x, is

dx P
ye =

|
|
.
|

\
|

dx P
Qe dx + c
Where

dx P
e is called the integrating factor.
Equations reducible to linear form :
Bernoulli's equation : A differential equation of
the form
dx
dy
+ Py = Qy
n
, where P and Q are
functions of x alone is called Bernoulli's equation.
Dividing by y
n
, we get y
n
dx
dy
+ y
(n 1)
. P = Q
Putting y
(n 1)
= Y, so that
n
y
n) 1 (
dx
dy
=
dx
dY
,
we get
dx
dY
+ (1 n)P. Y = (1 n)Q
which is a linear differential equation.
If the given equations is of the form

dx
dy
+ P. f(y) = Q . g(y), where P and Q are
functions of x alone, we divide the equation by
g(y) and get

dx
dy
y g ) (
1
+ P.
) (
) (
y g
y f
= Q
Now substitute
) (
) (
y g
y f
= v and solve.
Solution of the differential equation :

2
2
dx
y d
= f(x) is obtained by integrating it with respect
to x twice.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 56 JANUARY 2011











Some Important Definitions and Formulae :
Measurement of angles : The angles are measured
in degrees, grades or in radius which are defined as
follows:
Degree : A right angle is divided into 90 equal parts
and each part is called a degree. Thus a right angle is
equal to 90 degrees. One degree is denoted by 1.
A degree is divided into sixty equal parts is called a
minute. One minute is denoted by 1.
A minute is divided into sixty equal parts and each
parts is called a second. One second is denoted by 1.
Thus,
1 right angle = 90 (Read as 90 degrees)
1 = 60 (Read as 60 minutes)
1 = 60 (Read as 60 seconds).
Grades : A right angle is divided into 100 equal parts
and each part is called a grade. Thus a right angle is
equal to 100 grades. One grade is denoted by 1
g
.
A grade is divided into 100 equal parts and each part
is called a minute and is denoted by 1.
A minute is divided into 100 equal parts and each
part is called a second and is denoted by 1"
Thus,
1 right angled = 100
g
(Read as 100 grades)
1
g
= 100 (Read as 100 minutes)
1 = 100 (Read as 100 seconds)
Radians : A radian is the angle subtended at the
centre of a circle by an arc equal in length to the
radius of the circle.
Domain and Range of a Trigono. Function :
If f : X Y is a function, defined on the set X, then
the domain of the function f, written as Domf is the
set of all independent variables x, for which the
image f(x) is well defined element of Y, called the co-
domain of f.
Range of f : X Y is the set of all images f(x) which
belongs to Y, i.e.,
Range f = {f(x) Y : x X} Y
The domain and range of trigonmetrical functions are
tabulated as follows :
Trigo.
Function
Domain Range
sin x R, the set of all the
real number
1 sin x 1
cos x R 1 cos x 1
tan x
R
)
`

+ I n n ,
2
) 1 2 (

R
cosec x R {n , n I}
R {x : 1 < x <
1}
sec x
R
)
`

+ I n n ,
2
) 1 2 (

R {x : 1 < x <
1}
cot x R {n , n I} R

Relation between Trigonometrically Ratios and
identities:
tan =

cos
sin
; cot =

sin
cos

sin A cosec A = tan A cot A = cos A sec A = 1
sin
2
+ cos
2
= 1
or sin
2
= 1 cos
2
or cos
2
= 1 sin
2

1 + tan
2
= sec
2

or sec
2
tan
2
= 1 or sec
2
1 = tan
2

1 + cot
2
= cosec
2

or cosec
2
cot
2
= 1 or cosec
2
1 = cot
2

Since sin
2
A + cos
2
A = 1, hence each of sin A and
cos A is numerically less than or equal to unity.
i.e.
| sin A| 1 and | cos A | 1
or 1 sin A 1 and 1 cos A 1
Note : The modulus of real number x is defined as
|x| = x if x 0 and |x| = x if x < 0.
Since sec A and cosec A are respectively
reciprocals of cos A and sin A, therefore the values of
sec A and cosec A are always numerically greater
than or equal to unity i.e.
sec A 1 or sec A 1
and cosec A 1 or cosec A 1
In other words, we never have
TRIGONOMETRICAL
RATIOS
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 57 JANUARY 2011
1 < cosec A < 1 and 1 < sec A < 1.
Trigonometrical Ratios for Various Angles :

0
6


2
3
2
sin

0
2
1

2
1

2
3

1 0 1 0
cos

1
2
3

2
1

2
1
0

1
0 1
tan

0
3
1
1
3
0 0

Trigonometrical Ratios for Related Angles :


2




2
3


2

sin sin

cos m sin

cos

sin

cos cos m sin

cos

sin

cos
tan tan

m cot

tan

m cot

tan

cot cot

m tan

cot

m tan

cot


Addition and Subtraction Formulae :
sin (A B) = sin A cos B cos A sin B
cos (A B) = cos A cos B m sin A sin B
tan (A B) =
B A
B A
tan tan 1
tan tan
m


cot (A B) =
A B
B A
cot cot
1 cot cot

m

sin (A + B) sin (A B) = sin
2
A sin
2
B
= cos
2
B cos
2
A
cos (A + B) cos (A B) = cos
2
A sin
2
B
= cos
2
B sin
2
A
Formulae for Changing the Sum or Difference into
Product :
sin C + sin D = 2 sin
2
D C +
cos
2
D C

sin C sin D = 2 cos
2
D C +
sin
2
D C

cos C + cos D = 2 cos
2
D C +
cos
2
D C

cos C cos D = 2 sin
2
D C +
sin
2
C D

Formulae for Changing the Product into Sum or
Difference :
2 sin A cos B = sin (A + B) + sin (A B)
2 cos A sin B = sin (A + B) sin (A B)
2 cos A cos B = cos (A + B) + cos (A B)
2 sin A sin B = cos (A B) cos(A + B)
Formulae Involving Double, Triple and Half Angles :
sin 2 = 2 sin cos =
+

2
tan 1
tan 2

cos 2 = cos
2
sin
2
= 2 cos
2
1
= 1 2 sin
2
=
+

2
2
tan 1
tan 1

sin
2

=
2
cos 1
; cos
2

=
2
cos 1 +

tan
2

=
+

cos 1
cos 1

tan 2 =

2
tan 1
tan 2

sin 3 = 3 sin 4 sin
3

or sin
3
=
4
1
(3 sin sin 3)
cos 3 = 4 cos
3
3 cos
or cos
3
=
4
1
(3 cos + cos 3)
tan 3 =


2
3
tan 3 1
tan tan 3
(


+
6
n
Trigonometrical Ratios for Some Special Angles :


2
1
7 15 22
2
1

sin

2 2
6 2 4
2 2
1 3
2
2 2
cos

2 2
6 2 4 + +
2 2
1 3 +
2
2 2 +
tan

( 3 2 )
( 2 1)
2 3 2 1

18 36
sin
4
1 5

4
5 2 10
cos
4
5 2 10 +

4
1 5 +

tan
5
5 10 25
5 2 5
Important Points to Remember :
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 58 JANUARY 2011
Maximum and minimum values of
a sin x + b cos x are +
2 2
b a + ,
2 2
b a +
respectively.
sin
2
x + cosec
2
x 2 for every real x.
cos
2
x + sec
2
x 2 for every real x.
tan
2
x + cot
2
x 2 for every real x
If x = sec + tan , then
x
1
= sec tan
If x = cosec + cot , then
x
1
= cosec cot
cos . cos 2 . cos 4 . cos 8
.... cos 2
n1
=

sin 2
2 sin
n
n

sin sin (60 ) sin (60 + ) =
4
1
sin 3
cos cos (60 ) cos (60 + ) =
4
1
cos 3
tan tan (60 ) tan (60 + ) = tan 3
Conditional Identities :
1. If A + B + C = 180, then
sin 2A + sin 2B + sin 2C = 4 sin A sin B sin C
sin 2A + sin 2B sin 2C = 4 cos A cos B sin C
sin (B + C A) + sin (C + A B) + sin (A + B C)
= 4 sin A sin B sin C
cos 2A + cos 2B + cos 2C
= 1 4 cos A cos B cos C
cos 2A + cos 2B cos 2C = 1 4 sin A sin B cos C
2. If A + B + C = 180, then
sin A + sin B + sin C = 4 cos
2
A
cos
2
B
cos
2
C

sin A + sin B sin C = 4 sin
2
A
sin
2
B
sin
2
C

cos A + cos B + cos C = 1 + 4 sin
2
A
sin
2
B
sin
2
C

cos A + cos B cos C = 1 + 4cos
2
A
cos
2
B
sin
2
C


C B
A
sin sin
cos
+
A C
B
sin sin
cos
+
B A
C
sin sin
cos
= 2
3. If A + B + C = , then
sin
2
A + sin
2
B sin
2
C = 2 sin A sin B cos C
cos
2
A + cos
2
B

+ cos
2
C = 1 2 cos A cos B cos C
sin
2
A + sin
2
B + sin
2
C = 2 + 2 cos A cos B cos C
cos
2
A + cos
2
B cos
2
C = 1 2 sin A sin B cos C
4. If A + B + C = , then


sin
2
2
A
+ sin
2
2
B
+ sin
2
2
C
= 1 2 sin
2
A
sin
2
B
sin
2
C

cos
2
2
A
+cos
2
2
B
+ cos
2
2
C
= 2 + 2 sin
2
A
sin
2
B
sin
2
C

sin
2
2
A
+ sin
2
2
B
sin
2
2
C
= 1 2cos
2
A
cos
2
B
cos
2
C

cos
2
2
A
+ cos
2
2
B
cos
2
2
C
= 2cos
2
A
cos
2
B
sin
2
C

5. If x + y + z = /2, then
sin
2
x + sin
2
y + sin
2
z

= 1 2 sin x sin y sin z
cos
2
x

+ cos
2
y

+ cos
2
z = 2 + 2 sin x sin y sin z
sin 2x + sin 2y + sin 2z = 4 cos x cos y cos z
6. If A + B + C = , then
tan A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C
cot B cot C + cot C cot A + cot A cot B = 1
tan
2
B
tan
2
C
+ tan
2
C
tan
2
A
+ tan
2
A
tan
2
B
= 1
cot
2
A
+ cot
2
B
+ cot
2
C
= cot
2
A
cot
2
B
cot
2
C

7. (a) For any angles A, B, C we have
sin (A + B + C)
= sin A cos B cos C + cos A sin B cos C
+ cos A cos B sin C sin A sin B sin C
cos (A + B + C)
= cos A cos B cos C cos A sin B sin C
sin A cos B sin C sin A sin B cos C
tan(A + B + C)
=
A C C B B A
C B A C B A
tan tan tan tan tan tan 1
tan tan tan tan tan tan

+ +

(b) If A,B, C are the angles of a triangle, then
sin(A + B + C) = sin = 0 and
cos (A + B + C) = cos = 1
then (a) gives
sin A sin B sin C
= sin A cos B cos C + cos A sin B cos C
+ cos A cos B sin C
and (a) gives
1 + cos A cos B cos C
= cos A sin B sin C + sin A cos B sin C
+ sin A sin B cos C
Method of Componendo and Dividendo :
If
q
p
=
b
a
, then by componendo and dividendo we
can write

q p
q p
+

=
b a
b a
+

or
p q
p q
+

=
a b
a b
+


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 59 JANUARY 2011
or
q p
q p

+
=
b a
b a

+
or
p q
p q

+
=
a b
a b

+


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 60 JANUARY 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 60 JANUARY 2011
a














PHYSICS

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1. A 6 kg block rests as shown on the upper surface of a
15 kg wedge neglecting friction, the system is
released from rest. The acceleration of B relative to A
is (g = 10 m/sec
2
)
B
A
6 kg
15 kg
30

(A) 5.5 m/sec
2
(B) 2.75 m/sec
2

(C) 11 m/sec
2
(D) 8.25 m/sec
2


2. A ideal gas having molar specific heat at constant
volume C
V
. If is undergoing a process where
temperature is varying as T = T
0
e
V
where is
constant and ''V'' is the volume occupied by the gas.
The molar specific heat of the gas for the given
process as a function of volume is given by -
(A) C
V
+
V
R
(B) C
V
+
V
R


(C) C
V
+
V
R 2
(D) C
V
+
V
R
2

3. An earthen pitcher loses 1 gm of water per minute
due to evaporation. If the water equivalent of pitcher
is 0.5 kg and pitcher contains 9.6 kg of water,
calculate the time required for the water in pitcher to
cool to 25 C from original temperature 30C.
Neglect radiation effects. Latent heat of vaporization
in this range of temperature is 580 cal/gm and
specific heat of water is 1 cal/gm C
(A) 30.5 min (B) 41.2 min
(C) 38.6 min (D) 34.5 min

4. A point object and a
plane mirror are moving
as shown figure at t = 0.
The x-comp. of velocity
of image at t = 1 sec will
be -
(A) 6 m/s toward left
(B) 6 m/s towards right
(C) 3 3 m/s towards left
(D) None of these

5. A convex lens of focal length 10 m starts falling with
its plane horizontal. There is a stationary point object
20 m above it in its axis. Find the velocity of its
image at t = 1 sec

20 m/s
g = 10 m/s
2
at t = 0

IIT-JEE 2011
XtraEdge Test Series # 9
Based on New Pattern
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
Section - I
Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for correct
answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one is correct answer. +3 marks and 1 mark for
wrong answer.
Question 14 to 19 are passage based single type questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and
-1 mark for wrong answer..
Section - II
Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer. However, +1 mark will be given for a correctly
marked answer in any row.

2m/s
1m/s
1m/s
2

2m/s
2
30
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 61 JANUARY 2011
(A) 7.5 m/s (B) 7.5 m/s
(C) 12.5 m/s (D) 5 m/s

6. For the circuit shown here keys k
1
and k
3
are closed
for 1 second. Key k
2
is closed at the instant k
1
and k
3

are opened. Maximum charge on the capacitor after
key k
2
is closed is

2V
2F
4V
2
k3
k2
k1
0.5
2H

(A) Cb
e
|
.
|

\
| 1
1 4 (B) Cb
e
|
.
|

\
| 1
1 2 4
(C) Cb
e
|
.
|

\
| 1
1 8 (D) zero

7. The metal (hollow) sphere of radius R, 2R and 3R are
placed into each other such that their centres are at
the same point. The inner sphere is given a charge of
Q, the middle one is charged to 2Q and the outer one
is charged to 3Q. Find the potentials, measured from
the common centre of the circles, at a distance 4R, if
the potential at the centre is taken to be zero -
(A)
R
KQ
2
3
(B)
R
KQ
2
3

(C)
R
KQ
(D)
R
KQ
2


8. A wire loop ABCDE carrying a current I is placed in
x-y plane as shown in figure. A particle of mass m
and charge q is projected from origin with velocity
V
r
=
2
0
V
) j i (
^ ^
+ m/s. The instantaneous acceleration
acts along the (r-radius of circular arc ABC)
y
45
x
O
D
E
90
r/2
B
C
A

(A) AO (B) OA
(C) x-axis (D) OP

9. A source is moving across a circle given by equation
x
2
+ y
2
= R
2
with constant speed
3 6
330
m/sec in
anticlockwise sense. A detector is at rest at point
(2R, 0) w.r.t. centre of circle. If the frequency emitted
by the source is f
0
and speed of sound is 330 m/sec.
Then
(A) The position of source when detector records the
maximum frequency is
(
(

+
2
R
,
2
R 3

(B) The coordinate of source when detector records
minimum frequency is [R, R]
(C) Maximum frequency recorded by detector is
3 6
3 6
+
f
0

(D) Minimum frequency recorded by detector is
3 6
3 6
f
0


This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.
10. Assertion (A) : In case of an electron and a photon
having same momentum, wavelength associated with
electron is smaller.
Reason (R) : Electron cannot move with a speed of
photon.

11. Assertion (A) : In the process of photoelectric
emission by monochromatic light, all the emitted
photo-electrons possess the same kinetic energy.
Reason (R) : In photoelectric effect a single photon
interacts with a single electron and electron is
emitted only if energy of each of incident photon is
greater than the work function.

12. Assertion (A) : During phase transformation internal
energy of material doesn't changes.
Reason (R) : Temperature of material remains same
during phase-transformation.

13. Assertion (A) : At the temperature T
1
, v
rms
of
hydrogen may be equal to v
rms
of oxygen at temperature
T
2
.
Reason (R) : v
rms
speed of a gas is proportional to
the square root of its absolute temperature.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 62 JANUARY 2011
This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
In a YDSE setup (see figure) the light source
executes SHM between P and Q according to
equation n = A sin t. S being the mean position.
Assume d <<< D, A <<< L and small enough to
neglect

Doppler effect. If source were stationary at S.
intensity at O would be I
0


x
S1
S2
d O
D
L
Q S P
O : point of central

14. The fractional change in intensity of central maxima
as a function of time is -
(A)
L
t A sin
(B)
L
t A sin 2

(C)
L
t A sin 3
(D)
L
t A
2
sin


15. When source comes towards Q -
(A) The bright fringes will be less bright
(B) The bright fringes will be more bright
(C) The fringe width will increase
(D) The fringe width will decrease

16. The fringe width can be expressed as -
(A) =
0
sin t (B) =
0
cos t
(C) =
0
cos 2 t (D) None of these

Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)
Circuit shown in figure is a part of circuit. The
potential at different points are as indicated in the
diagram. Capacitance of all capacitors are in F.

7V
10V
5V 20V
5V
1F
8F
4F
10F
2F
5F
6F
G
H
10V

17. Potential at G is approximately -
(A) 9.82 V (B) 8.32 V (C) 6.25 V (D) 2.5 V

18. Potential at H is approximately -
(A) 9.75 V (B) 13.18 V (C) 9 V (D) 11 V

19. Charge (in C) across 10 F capacitor is nearly -
(A) 18.2 (B) 33.6 (C) 16.4 (D) 42.8


This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements
(P, Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these
questions have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated
in the following example. If the correct matches are A-P,
A-S, B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
20. A block placed on rough inclined plane. Angle of
inclination of the plane as shown in varied starting
from zero. The coefficient of static friction and
kinetic friction between the block and the plane is
s

and
k
respectively (
s
>
k
). Column-II shows the
graphs which necessarily contains taken on x-axis.
Column-I represents the quantities taken on y-axis of
column-I

m



Column-I Column-II

(A) Friction force between (P)
the block and plane


(B) Normal force between (Q)
the block and plane


(C) Total contact force (R)
between the block
and plane


(D) Acceleration of block (S)

21. The figure shows two mirrors placed as shown near
monochromatic light source S. (wavelength and
intensity at point P = I
0
). If I
net
is the resultant
intensity at point P due to super position of direct and
reflected waves. Then match the following columns.








XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 63 JANUARY 2011

P S
d/2
d/2
D

Column-I Column-II
(A) If
D
d
2
= (P) I
net
= 9I
0

(B) If
D
d
2
=
2

(Q) I
net
= 5I
0

(C) If
D
d
2
<<< (R) I
net
= I
0

(D) If one mirror is (S) I
net
= 4I
0

removed and

D
d
2
=

22. Twelve identical metal rods are joined to form a cube
as shown in figure. A
1
, A
2
... A
4
are corner of cube P,
Q and R are mid-point of A
1
A
5
, A
4
A
8
and A
5
A
8

respectively. When A
1
and A
3
are maintained at 120
C and 0C respectively, heat flown across A
1
and A
3

is 80 Joule/sec.
Column-I contains different location in cube
Column-II contains temperature at and current
through that locations.

A1
P
A5
R
A8 A7
A6
A3
A2
A4
Q

Column-I Column-II
(A) P (P) 60C
(B) Q (Q) 100C
(C) R (R) 70C
(D) A
4
(S) 10 J/sec

CHEMISTRY

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1. Vander Waal's equation for a real gas is

|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
2
V
a n
P (V nb) = nRT
Plot of quantity Q =
b a
ab
+
with temperature is
(A)

T
Q
(B)

Q
T


(C)

T
Q
(D)

T
Q


2. A solution containing NaOH and Na
2
CO
3
was titrated
against HCl using phenolphthalein as an indicator.
The tire value of HCl solution was found to be x ml.
At the end point, methyl orange was added and the
titration continued. A further y ml of HCl solution
was required to get the end point with methyl orange.
The volume of HCl solution used with Na
2
CO
3

during the whole process is
(A) 2x (B) 2y (C) x (D) y x

3. Equal volumes of 1 M KMnO
4
and 1 M K
2
Cr
2
O
7
are
used to oxidise ferrous ion (Fe
2+
) solution in acidic
medium. The amount of ferrous ions used with
KMnO
4
is
(A) less than that used with K
2
Cr
2
O
7

(B) more than that used with K
2
Cr
2
O
7

(C) equal to that used with K
2
Cr
2
O
7

(D) cannot be compared

4. For crystallisation of a solid from the aqueous
solution, if the values of H and S are x J mol
1

and y J K
1
mol
1
respectively, which of the
following relationships is correct
(A) x = T y (B) x > T y
(C) x < T y (D) None of these

5. Hexamethylenediamine, C
6
H
16
N
2
, is one of the
starting materials for the production of nylon. It can
be prepared from adipic acid C
6
H
10
O
4
, by the
following reaction
C
6
H
10
O
4
(l) + 2NH
3
(g) + 4H
2
(g)
C
6
H
16
N
2
(l) + 4H
2
O(l)
If 385 g of hexamethylenediamine is made from
5.00 10
2
g of adipic acid, the percent yield is
(A) 24.2 % (B) 75.0%

(C) 96.9 % (D) 99.9%
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 64 JANUARY 2011
6. One volume of an organic gaseous compound
containing carbon, hydrogen and nitrogen yielded 3
volumes of CO
2
, 4.5 volumes of water vapours and
half volume of N
2
on complete oxidation. The
molecular formula of the organic compound is
(A) C
3
H
9
N (B) C
3
H
9
N
2

(C) C
3
H
3
N
3
(D) CH
2
N
2


7. Reduction of but-2-yne with Na and liquid NH
3
gives
an alkene which upon catalytic hydrogenation with
D
2
/Pt gives an alkane. The alkene and alkane formed
respectively are
(A) cis but-2-ene and racemic-2, 3-dideuterobutane
(B) trans but-2-ene and meso 2, 3-dideuterobutane
(C) trans but-2-ene and racemic 2, 3-dideuterobutane
(D) cis but-2-ene and meso 2, 3-dideuterobutane

8. The order of K
eq
values for the following keto-enol
equilibrium constants is
CH
3
CHO
K
1
CH
2
= CHOH


K
2
CH
3
CCH
2
CCH
3
O

O

CH
3
C=CHCCH
3
OH
O
K
3
CH
3
CCH
3

O

CH
2
=CCH
3
OH


(A) K
1
> K
2
> K
3

(B) K
2
> K
3
> K
1

(C) K
2
> K
1
> K
3

(D) K
1
> K
3
> K
2


9.
+
O
1. AlCl
3
2. H
+
/H
2
O
A


The product 'A' is
(A)

Me
Ph
OH
(B)

O
Ph
OH

(C)

OH
H
Me
Ph
(D)

Ph
H

This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : The heat absorbed during the
isothermal expansion of an ideal gas against vacuum
is zero.
Reason (R) : The volume occupied by the molecules
of an ideal gas is zero.

11. Assertion (A) : The value of van der Waals constant
'a' is larger for ammonia than for nitrogen.
Reason (R): Hydrogen bonding is present in
ammonia.

12. Assertion (A): 3-hydroxy - butan-2-one on treatment
with [Ag(NH
3
)
2
]

cause precipitation of silver.
Reason (R): [Ag(NH
3
)
2
]

oxidises 3-hydroxy butan-
2-one to butan-2-3-dione

13. Assertion (A): HBr adds to 1,4-pentadiene at a faster
rate than to 1,3-pentadiene
Reason (R): 1,4-pentadiene is less stable than
1,3-pentadiene.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
The temperature dependence of the dissociation
constant for the formic acid in aqueous is given by
log K
a
=
T
1400
+ 5 0.01 T
The enthalpy of neutralisation between strong acid
and strong base at 27C is equal to 56 kJ/equal.

14. What is the enthalpy of neutralisation of HCOOH
against NaOH at 27C ?
(A) 56 kJ/mol (B) + 56 kJ/mol
(C) 46.427 kJ/mol (D) 9.573 kJ/mol

15. What is the standard entropy change for the
dissociation of HCOOH at 300 K ?
(A) 19.147 J K
1
mol
1

(B) +19.147 kJ K
1
mol
1

(C) 73 J K
1
mol
1

(D) 40 JK
1
mol
1

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 65 JANUARY 2011
16. At what approximate temperature the dissociation for
formic acid is maximum ?
(A) 300 K (B) 374 K
(C) 474 K
(D) There is no maximum temperature for dissociation

Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)


OH
CH
3

CHCl
3
+ NaOH
P HCN/NH
4
Cl
H
3
O
+
/
(R) -amino acid
(zwitter ion)
O
CH
3
CHCl
2
H

Isomerisation
OH


Q

17. Product P is -
(A)
OH
CHO
(B)
OH
CHO
(C)
OH
CH
3

OHC
CHO
(D)
OH
CHO
CH
3



18. Product R is -
(A)
OH
CH
3

CHCH
2
COO


NH
3


(B)
OH
CH
3

CHCOO

NH
3



(C)

O


CH
3

CHCOOH
NH
3


(D)
OH
CHCOO

NH
3






19. Product Q is -
(A)
OH
CHO
CH
3

(B)
OH
CHCl
2
CH
3


(C)
OH
CHO
CH
3

(D)
O
CHO
CH
3



This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (P,
Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these questions
have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the
following example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S,
B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.

20. Column I Column II
(A) NH
3
NO
3

(P) M/20
(B) Fe
2
S
3
2FeSO
4
+ SO
2
(Q) M/5
(C) KMnO
4
in acidic medium (R) M/8
(D) CuS CuSO
4
(S) M

21. Column I Column II
(A) Cyclopropenyl carbocation (P) Hyperconjugation
(B) Cyclopentadienyl anion (Q) All carbon atoms
are sp
2
hybridized
(C) Benzyne (R) Aromatic nature
(D) t-Butyl carbocation (S) Diamagnetic

22. Column I Column II
(A) Pyrrole (P) Explosive
(B) Nitrobenzene (Q) Aromatic
(C) Trinitrotoluene (R) sp
2
hybrid oxygen
(D) Benzaldehyde (S) less reactive benzene in
electrophilic substitution
reaction


MATHEMATICS


Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 66 JANUARY 2011
1. If , , , are four complex numbers such that

is
real and 0, then z =
t
t
+
+
, t R
represents a
(A) circle (B) parabola
(C) ellipse (D) straight line

2. Let S denote the set of all real values of a for which
the roots of the equation (1 + a) x
2
3ax + 4a = 0
exceed 1, then S equals
(A) |
.
|

0 ,
7
16
(B) |
.
|

\
|
1 ,
7
16

(C) ( 1 , 2) (D) (1, 3)

3. Sum of the coefficients of the terms of degree m in
the expansion of (1 + x)
n
(1 + y)
n
(1 + z)
n
is
(A) (
n
C
m
)
3
(B) 3(
n
C
m
)
(C)
n
C
3m
(D)
3n
C
m


4. The system of linear equations x + y + z = 6,
x + 2y + 3z = 14 and 2x + 5y + z = (, R) has a
unique solution
(A) 8 (B) = 8, 36
(C) = 8, = 36 (D) none of these

5. The plane 2x y + 3z + 5 = 0 is rotated through 90
about its line of intersection with the plane
5x 4y 2z + 1 = 0. The equation of the plane in the
new position is
(A) 6x 9y 29z 31 = 0
(B) 27x 24y 26z 13 = 0
(C) 43x 32y 2z + 27 = 0
(D) 26x 43y 151z 165 = 0

6. If f(x) f(x) =
|
|
.
|

\
|
xy
y x
f
1

and f has domain (1, 1)


then a function satisfying the above functional
equation is
(A) 2 + log |
.
|

\
| +
x
x
1
1
(B) log |
.
|

\
|
+ x
x
1
1

(C) log
2
1
2
x
x
(D) tan
1
|
.
|

\
| +
x
x
1
1


7. Tangent is drawn to ellipse
27
2
x
+ y
2
= 1 at
(3 3 cos , sin ) (where (0, /2)). Then the
value of such that sum of intercepts on axes made
by this tangent is least is
(A) /3 (B) /6
(C) /8 (D) /4
8. If I =
( )

+
2 / 3
2
2 x ax
dx
, then I is equal to
(A)
2
2 x ax
a x
+
+
+ C (B)
2
2
1
x ax
a x
a
+
+
+ C
(C)
2
2
2
1
x ax
a x
a
+
+
+ C (D)
3
3
2
1
x ax
a x
a
+
+
+ C

9. If for k N,

x
kx
sin
2 sin
= 2[cos x + cos 3x + ... + cos (2k 1)x],
then value of I =

2 /
0
2 sin kx cot x dx is
(A) /2 (B) 0
(C) /2 (D)

This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : cosec
1
(3/2) + cos
1
(2/3) 2 cot
1
(1/7)
cot
1
7 is equal to cot
1
7.
Reason (R) : sin
1
x + cos
1
x = /2, tan
1
x + cot
1
x
= /2, cosec
1
x = sin
1
(1/x), cot
1
(x) = tan
1
(1/x)

11. Assertion (A) : Equation of a circle through the origin
and belonging to the co-axial system, of which the
limiting points are (1, 1) and (3, 3) is
2x
2
+ 2y
2
3x 3y = 0
Reason (R) : Equation of a circle passing through
the points (1, 1) and (3, 3) is x
2
+ y
2
2x 6y + 6 = 0

12. Assertion (A) : The absolute minimum value of
|x 1| + | x 2| + |x 3| is 2.
Reason (R) : The function |x 1| + |x 2| + |x 3| is
differentiable on R ~ {1, 2}.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 67 JANUARY 2011
13. Assertion (A) : Curve satisfying the differential
equation y' = y/2x passing through (2, 1) is a parabola
with focus (1/4, 0).
Reason (R) : The differentiable equation y' = y/2x is
of variable separable.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
There are n urns each containing (n +1) balls such
that the i
th
urn contains 'i' white balls and (n + 1 i)
red balls. Let u
i
be the event of selecting i
th
urn,
i = 1, 2, 3, ..., n and W denotes the event of getting a
white balls.
14. If P(u
i
) i, where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., n, then
n
lim P(W) is
equal to :
(A) 1 (B)
3
2

(C)
4
1
(D)
4
3


15. If P(u
i
) = c, where c is a constant, then P(u
i
/W) is
equal to :
(A)
1
2
+ n
(B)
1
1
+ n

(C)
1 + n
n
(D)
2
1


16. If n is even and E denotes the event of choosing even
numbered urn |
.
|

\
|
=
n
u P
i
1
) ( , then the value of
P(W/E) is :
(A)
1 2
2
+
+
n
n
(B)
) 1 ( 2
2
+
+
n
n

(C)
1 + n
n
(D)
1
1
+ n


Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)

For every function f(x) which is twice differentiable,
these will be good approximation of

|
.
|

\
|

b
a
c b
dx x f
2

) ( {f(a) + f(b)}. Now if we take


c =
2
b a +
, then using above again, we get

b
a
dx x f ) ( =

c
a
dx x f ) ( +

b
c
dx x f ) (

4
a b
{f(a) + f(b) + 2f(c)}and so on.
We get approximation for value of

b
a
dx x f ) ( .
17. Good approximation of

2 /
0
sin x dx, is :
(A)
4

(B) ) 1 2 (
4
+


(C) ) 1 2 (
8
+

(D)
8



18. If f " (x) < 0, x (a, b), and (c, f(c)) is point of
maxima where c (a, b), then f ' (c) is :

(A)
a b
a f b f

) ( ) (
(B) |
.
|

\
|
a b
a f b f

) ( ) (
3
(C) |
.
|

\
|
a b
a f b f

) ( ) (
2 (D) 0

19. If
3
) (
)} ( ) ( {
2
) (
) (
lim
a t
a f t f
a t
dx x f
t
a
a t

= 0,
then degree of polynomial function f(x) at-most is:
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 3 (D) 2

This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (P,
Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these questions
have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the
following example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S,
B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :

A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 68 JANUARY 2011
20. Column-I Column-II
(A) Two rays in I quadrant (P) 2
x + y = |a| and ax y = 1
intersect each other in the
interval a (a
0
, ), then
value of (2a
0
/3) is
(B) Point (, , ) lie on the (Q) 3/2
plane x + y + z = 2, let

a =
^
i +
^
j +
^
k

^
k ) (
^
a k
r
= 0, then is
(C)

1
0
2
) 1 ( dy y +

0
1
2
) 1 ( dy y (R)

1
0
1 dx x
+

+
0
1
1 dx x
(D) If sin A sin B sin C (S) 1
+ cos A cos B = 1, then
the value of sin C =

21. Column-I Column-II
(A) Let f(x) = [x 1] + [1 x], (P) continuous at a
[x] is the G.I.F., a is an integer
(B) Let f be as in (A) a is not (Q)
0
lim
x
f(x) does not
an integer exist
(C) f(x) =
x x
a
x x
+
+
] [
1
] [
, x 0 (R) f(a) = 0
(D) f(x) =
x x
a a
x x
cos cot

cos cot
(S)
2 /
lim
x
f(x) = log a



22. Let a
k
=
n
C
k
for 0 k n and A
k
=
(

k
k
a
a
0
0
1
and
B =
1
1
1
.
+
=
k
n
k
k
A A =
(

b
a
0
0

Column-I Column-II
(A) a (P)
1
2
+ n
n
(
2n
C
n
)
(B) a b (Q) 0
(C) a + b (R)
2n
C
n+1

(D)
b
a
(S) 1



























































SCIENCE TIPS


What is the expression for growing current, in LR
circuit ? I = I
0

|
|
.
|

\
|

t
L
R
e 1
What is the range of infrared spectrum ?
This covers wavelengths
from 10
3
m down to 7.8 10
7
m
What is the nature of graph between electric field
and potential energy (U) ?
The nature of the graph
will be parabola having
symmetry about U-axis
Why no beats can be heard if the frequencies of
the two interfering waves differ by more than ten ?
this is due to persistence
of hearing
Why heating systems based on steam are more
efficient than those based on circulation of hot
water ? This is because steam
has more heat than water
a the same temperature
Can the specific heat of a gas be infinity ? Yes
What is the liquid ascent formula for a capillary ?
h =
pg
cos T 2


3
r

where h is the height through
which a liquid of density and
surface tension T rises in a
capillary tube of radius r
What is the expression for total time of flight (T)
for oblique projection ? T =
g
sin u 2

The space charge limited current i
P
in the diode
value is given by i
P
= k V
p
3/2

What is an ideal gas ? An ideal gas is one in
which intermolecular
forces are absent
Can a rough sea be calmed by pouring oil on its
surface ? Yes
What is the expression for fringe width () in
Young's double slit experiment? =D/d where
D is the distance between the
source and screen and d is
distance between two slits
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 69 JANUARY 2011
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 70 JANUARY 2011








































PHYSICS

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1. A man is throwing bricks of mass 2 kg each onto a
floor of height 2 m. Bricks reach to floor with speed
10 2 m/s. If man throws 10 bricks in a minute,
power of man is
(A)
3
40
Watt (B)
4
45
Watt
(C)
3
20
Watt (D)
3
35
Watt

2. Figure shows a sphere of radius R from which a sphere of
radius R/2 is cut. There is a point 'P' on
x-axis. Let E
1
and E
2
respectively be gravitation field at
point P when it is at distance r
1
and r
2
from centre. Then

y
x

(A) r
1
< r
2
< R then E
1
= E
2
(B) r
1
< r
2
< R then E
1
< E
2

(C) r
1
< R < r
2
then E
1
> E
2
(D) R < r
1
< r
2
then E
1
< E
2

3. A ball is thrown in air making some angle with
horizontal. Considering buoyancy due to air which is
equal to
50
1
th of weight of ball, percentage change
in range of ball is
(A) Zero (B) 2%
(C) 2% (D) 5%

4. Two blocks of mass m
1
and m
2
are kept on
frictionless inclined plane as shown in figure.
Friction coefficient between blocks is ''. Friction on
block 1 is

2
1


(A) m
1
g cos up the plane
(B) m
1
g cos down the plane
(C) m
1
g sin up the plane
(D) Zero

5. A block is projected up an incline plane having angle
of inclination 60 with speed gh 6 . Maximum
height attained by block is
u
h


(A) 2.5 h (B) 2 h
(C) 1.5 h (D) 0.5 h
IIT-JEE 2012
XtraEdge Test Series # 9
Based on New Pattern
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus :
Physics : Full Syllabus, Chemistry : Full Syllabus, Mathematics : Full syllabus
Instructions :
Section - I
Question 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded for correct
answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Question 10 to 13 are Reason and Assertion type question with one is correct answer. +3 marks and 1 mark for
wrong answer.
Question 14 to 19 are passage based single type questions. +4 marks will be awarded for correct answer and
-1 mark for wrong answer..
Section - II
Question 20 to 22 are Column Matching type questions. +6 marks will be awarded for the complete correctly
matched answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer. However, +1 mark will be given for a correctly
marked answer in any row.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 71 JANUARY 2011
6. AA and BB are two parallel axis through a body of
mass 'M' shown in figure. Point 'C' is center of mass
of the body. If I
AA
= I
0
, then I
BB
is equal to


B A
B A
d
d
C


(A) I
0
+ Md
2
(B) I
0
+ 2Md
2

(C) I
0
Md
2
(D) I
0
+ 3Md
2


7. An ice-cube is put into a glass of water. Water in
glass will get cooled primarily due to
(A) Convection
(B) Conduction
(C) Radiation
(D) Conduction & Radiation

8. Minimum height through which an ice cube must fall
so that all ice melt (assume that any loss of
mechanical energy get converted into thermal energy
and L
f
: Latent heat of fusion) is
(A)
g
L
f
2

(B)
g
L
f

(C)
g
L
f
2

(D) will depend on mass of ice-ball

9. A liquid X is kept in calibrated container 'C'.
Coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid and
container is
l
and
c
respectively. If level of liquid is
at 200 cc mark, then
(A) volume of container over liquid surface will not
change if
l
=
c

(B) level of liquid will remain at 200 cc mark, if

l
=
c

(C) level of liquid will may go above 200 cc mark, if

l
<
c

(D) none of these

This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : A block moving with constant speed
on a horizontal surface along a straight line cannot be
in translational equilibrium.
Reason (R) : Translational equilibrium means net
force acting on it is zero

11. Assertion (A) : At the highest position of a parabolic
trajectory of a projectile, time rate of change of speed
is zero.
Reason (R) : Angle between velocity vector and
acceleration vector is
2

at this position.

12. Assertion (A) : large normal force is required to
move apart two glass plates enclosing a thin water
film.
Reason (R) : Due to surface tension, water pulls
each plate towards each other.

13. Assertion (A) : A perfectly black coloured body
must acts as a black body.
Reason (R) : A perfectly black coloured body absorb
all light falling on it.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
A uniform disc of radius R and mass M has a round
cut as shown in figure. The mass of remaining portion
has mass 'm'.
B
C
B
AA
C

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 72 JANUARY 2011
14. Moment of inertia of body about BB is
(A)
8
11
2
MR
(B)
8
15
MR
2

(C)
48
15
MR
2
(D)
48
11
MR
2


15. Moment of inertia of body about CC is
(A)
8
MR 15
2
(B)
8
11
MR
2

(C)
48
15
MR
2
(D)
71
27
MR
2


16. If body is made free to rotate about horizontal axis
AA, angular acceleration of body when centre of
body and axis AA lie on same horizontal plane
(A)
R
g
20
7
(B)
R 15
g 8

(C)
R
g
45
28
(D) None of these

Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)
A cylindrical vessel of radius 'R' filled with water is
rotated about its vertical axis with a constant angular
velocity ''.
17. Shape of the meniscus will be
(A) circular away from centre
(B) parabolic away from centre
(C) convex
(D) none of these

18. Difference of height of the liquid level at centre and
surface of cylinder is
(A)
g 2
2

. R (B)
g
2

R
2

(C)
g 2
2

. R
2
(D)
2
3
g
2

R
2


19. If pressure at centre is P
0
and density of water is ''
then pressure at distance x from centre is
(A) P
0
+
2
2 2
r
(B) P
0

2
2 2
r

(C) P
0
+
2
2
r
(D) P
0
+
2
3
2 2
r


This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (P,
Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these questions
have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the
following example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S,
B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
20. A ball tied with a string of length 10 cm is free to
rotate in vertical circle. It is given velocity
2
7
meter/sec in horizontal direction when it is at
its lowest position. Then match the following :
Column-I Column-II
(A) Height at which the (P)
160
27

ball loses circular path
(in meter)
(B) Maximum height (Q)
2
1

reached by ball (in meter)
(C) Velocity of ball at the (R)
20
3

time of leaving circular
path (in meter/sec)
(D) Minimum velocity of (S)
2 2
1

ball (in meter/sec)
21. Column I contain different process and column II
contains molar heat capacity. Match the following:
Column-I Column-II
(A) T = T
0
e
V
(P) C
V
+
V 1
R
+

(B) P = P
0
e
V
(Q)
1
R

+
V P
R
0


(C) P = P
0
+ /V (R) C
V
+
V
R


(D) T = T
0
+ /V (S) C
V
+ R(1 +
V
T
0

)
22. Column-I contains some phenomena of heat transfer
and column-II contains the mechanism of heat transfer.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Heating up water in bucket (P) Convection
with immersion rod slightly
immersed in it
(B) Freezing of lakes in colder (Q) Conduction
region
(C) Cooling water in container (R) Radiation
with an ice cube fixed at the
bottom
(D) Heating up atmosphere (S) None of these
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 73 JANUARY 2011
CHEMISTRY

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1. The shape of TeCl
4
is -
(A) Linear (B) Square planar
(C) Tetrahedral (D) See-Saw

2. Oxidation states of carbon and nitrogen in KCN are,
respectively -
(A) 3, + 2 (B) + 2, 3
(C) + 1, 2 (D) zero each

3. How many moles of nitrogen is produced by the
oxidation of one mole of hydrazine by 2/3 mole
bromate ion
(A)
3
1
(B) 1 (C) 1.5 (D)

4. The IUPAC name of the compound is :
CCH
CH
3

CH
3

H
NH
2


(A) 1-amino-1-phenyl-2-methyl propane
(B) 2-methyl-1-phenyl propanamine
(C) 2-methyl-1-aminol-1-phenyl propane
(D) 1-isopropyl-1-phenyl methyl amine


5. If C
2
in above compound is rotated by 120 angle in
anticlockwise direction along C
2
C
3
, Which of the
following form will be produced

H H
H H
CH
3

(1)
CH
3

(2)
(3)
(4)

(A) Partial eclipsed (B) Perfectly eclipsed
(C) Staggered (D)Gauche conformation

6. Which of the following compounds will exhibit
geometrical isomerism ?
(A) 1-phenyl-2-butene (B) 3-phenyl-1-butene
(C) 2-phenyl-1-butene (D)1,1-dephenyl-1-propene

7. Which of the following is/are correct regarding
acceptors and donors ?
(A) acceptor have empty orbitals with correct
symmetry whereas donors have filled orbitals
with correct symmetry
(B) acceptor involve the metal ions with lower
oxidation state whereas donor favour the central
metal ion at higher oxidation state
(C) acceptor increases CFSE whereas donor
decreases CFSE
(D) All of the above are correct

8. An isotone of Ge
76
32
is :
(A) Ge
77
32
(B) As
77
33

(C) Se
77
34
(D) Se
79
34


9. The energy of an electron in the first Bohr orbit of H
atom is 13.6 eV. The possible energy value(s) of the
excited state(s) for electrons in Bohr orbits of
hydrogen is (are)
(A) 3.4 eV (B) 4.2 eV
(C) 6.8 eV (D) + 6.8 eV

This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : For each ten degree rise of temperature
the specific rate constant is nearly doubled.
Reason (R) : Energy-wise distribution of molecules
in a gas is an experimental function of temperature.

11. Assertion (A) : Dimethyl sulphide is commonly used
for the reduction of an ozonide of an alkene to get the
carbonyl compounds.
Reason (R) : It reduces the ozonide giveing water
soluble dimethyl sulphoxide and excess of it
evaporates.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 74 JANUARY 2011
12. Assertion (A) : In the titration of Na
2
CO
3
with HCl
using methyl orange indicator, the volume required
at the equivalence point is twice that of the acid
required using phenolphthalein indicator.
Reason (R) : Two moles of HCl are required for the
complete neutralization of one mole of Na
2
CO
3
.

13. Assertion (A) : Band gap in germanium is small.
Reason (R) : The energy spread of each germanium
atomic energy level is infinitesimally small.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
Several short-lived radioactive species have been
used to determine the age of wood or animal fossils.
One of the most interesting substances is
6
C
14
half-
life 5760 years) which is used in determining the age
of carbon-bearing materials (e.g. wood, animal
fossils, etc.) Carbon-14 is produced by the
bombardment of nitrogen atoms present in the upper
atmosphere with neutrons (from cosmic rays).
7
N
14
+
0
n
1

6
C
14
+
1
H
1

Thus carbon-14 is oxidised to CO
2
and eventually
ingested by plants and animals. The death of plants
or animals put an end to the intake of C
14
from the
atmosphere. After this the amount of C
14
in the dead
tissues starts decreasing due to its disintegration as
per the following reaction : (
6
C
14

7
N
14
+
1

0

The C
14
isotope enters the biosphere when carbon
dioxide is taken up in plant photosynthesis. Plant are
eaten by animals, which exhale C
14
as CO
2
.
Eventually, C
14
participates in many aspects of the
carbon cycle. The C
14
lost by radioactive decay is
constantly replenished by the production of new
isotopes in the atmosphere. In this decay-
replenishment process, a dynamic equilibrium is
established whereby the ratio of C
14
to C
12
remains
constant in living matter. But when an individual
plant or an animal dies, the C
14
isotope in it is no
longer replenished, so the ratio decreases as C
14
decays. So, the number of C
14
nuclei after time t
(after the death of living matter) would be less than
in a living matter. The decay constant can be
calculated using the following formula,
t
1/2
=

693 . 0

The intensity of the cosmic rays have remain the
same for 30,000 years. But since some years the
changes in this are observed due to excessive burning
of fossil fuel and nuclear tests.
14. Why do we use the carbon dating to calculate the age
of the fossil?
(A) Rate of exchange of carbon between atmosphere
and living is slower than decay of C
14

(B) It is not appropriate to use C
14
dating to
determine age
(C) Rate of exchange of C
14
between atmosphere and
living organism is so fast that an equilibrium is
set up between the intake of C
14
by organism and
its exponential decay
(D) none of the above

15. What should be the age of the fossil for meaningful
determination of its age?
(A) 6 years
(B) 6000 years
(C) 60,000 years
(D) can be used to calculate any age

16. A nuclear explosion has taken place leading to
increase in concentration of C
14
in nearby areas. C
14
concentration is C
1
in nearby areas and C
2
in areas far
away. If the age of the fossil is determined to be T
1

and T
1
at the respective places then
(A) The age of the fossil will increase at the place
where explosion has taken place and
T
1
T
2
=

1
ln
2
1
C
C

(B) The age of the fossil will decrease at the place
where explosion has taken place and
T
1
T
2
=

1
ln
2
1
C
C

(C) The age of fossil will be determined to be same
(D)
2
1
T
T
=
2
1
C
C


Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)
The noble gases have closed-shell electronic
configuration and are monoatomic gases under
normal conditions. The low boiling points of the
lighter noble gases are due to weak dispersion forces
between the atoms and the absence of other
interatomic interactions.
The direct reaction of xenon with fluorine leads to a
series of compounds with oxidation numbers +2, +4
and +6. XeF
4
reacts violently with water to given
XeO
3
. The compound of xenon exhibit rich
stereochemistry and their geometries can be deduced
considering the total number of electron pairs in the
valence shell.

17. Argon is used in are welding because of its
(A) low reactivity with metal
(B) ability to lower the melting point of metal
(C) Flammability
(D) high calorific value

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 75 JANUARY 2011
18. The structure of XeO
3
is
(A) linear (B) planar
(C) pyramidal (D) T-shaped

19. XeF
4
and XeF
6
are expected to be
(A) oxidizing (B) reducing
(C) unreactive (D) strongly basic

This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (P,
Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these questions
have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the
following example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S,
B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.

20. Match the extraction processes listed in Column-I
with metals listed in Column-II
Column-I Column-II
(A) Self-reduction (P) Lead
(B) Carbon reduction (Q) Silver
(C) Complex formation (R) Copper
and displacement by
metal
(D) Decomposition of (S) Boron
iodide

21. Match the column :
Column-I Column-II
(A) Efflorescent (P) NaOH
(B) Deliquescent (Q) KOH
(C) Fusion mixture (R) Na
2
CO
3
and K
2
CO
3

(D) washing soda (S) Na
2
CO
3
. 10H
2
O
(T) Na
2
SO
4


22. Match the half-reaction (in column I) with equivalent
mass (molar mass = M) (in column II)
Column I Column II
(A) Cr
2
O
7
2
Cr
3+
(P) M
(B) C
2
O
4
2
CO
2
(Q) M/2
(C) MnO
4

MnO
2
(R) M/6
(D) HC
2
O
4

C
2
O
4
2
(S) M/3

MATHEMATICS

Questions 1 to 9 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1. S
n
, the sum to n terms of the series
(n
2
1
2
) + 2(n
2
2
2
) + 3(n
2
3
2
) + ... is
(A)
4
1
n
2
(n
2
1) (B)
4
1
n(n + 1)
2

(C) 0 (D) 2n (n
2
1)

2. The number of ways of dividing 15 men and 15
women into 15 couples, each consisting of a man and
a woman, is
(A) 1240 (B) 1840
(C) 1820 (D) 2005

3. If cos ( ) = a and sin ( ) = b (0 < ,
< /2), then cos
2
( ) + 2ab sin ( ) is equal to
(A) 4a
2
b
2
(B) a
2
b
2

(C) a
2
+ b
2
(D) a
2
b
2
.

4. If A and B are acute positive angles satisfying the eq
n
.
3 sin
2
A + 2 sin
2
B = 1 and 3 sin 2A 2 sin 2B = 0,
then A + 2B is equal to
(A) /4 (B) /2
(C) 3/4 (D) 2/3

5. In a triangle ABC,
C
r r
cos 1
2 1
+
+
is equal to
(A)

abc 2
(B)

+
c
b a

(C)
2
abc
(D)
2

abc


6. If P is a point (x, y) on the line y = 3x such that P
and the point (3, 4) are on the opposite sides of the
line 3x 4y = 8, then
(A) x > 8/15, y < 8/5 (B) x > 8/5, y < 8/15
(C) x = 8/15, y = 8/5 (D) none of these

7. C
1
and C
2
are circles of unit radius with centres at
(0, 0) and (1, 0) respectively. C
3
is a circle of unit
radius, passes through the centres of the circles C
1

and C
2
and have its centre above x-axis. Equation of
the common tangent to C
1
and C
3
which does not
pass through C
2
is
(A) x 3 y + 2 = 0 (B) 3 x y + 2 = 0
(C) 3 x y 2 = 0 (D) x + 3 y + 2 = 0

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 76 JANUARY 2011
8. If the tangent at a point (a cos , b sin ) on the
ellipse x
2
/a
2
+ y
2
/b
2
= 1 meets the auxillary circle in
two points, the chord joining them subtends a right
angle at the centre; then the eccentricity of the ellipse
is given by
(A) (1 + cos
2
)
1/2
(B) 1 + sin
2

(C) (1 + sin
2
)
1/2
(D) 1 + cos
2


9. If p
th
, q
th
, r
th
term of a G.P. are the positive numbers
a, b, c, then the angle between the vectors log a
2
i +
log b
2
j + log c
2
k and (q r)i + (r p)j + (p q)k is
(A) /3 (B) /2
(C) sin
1

2 2 2
/ 1 c b a + + (D) none of these

This section contains 4 questions numbered 10 to 13,
(Reason and Assertion type question). Each question
contains Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +3 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.
The following questions given below consist of an
"Assertion" (A) and "Reason" (R) Type
questions. Use the following Key to choose the
appropriate answer.
(A) If both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
(B) If both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
(C) If (A) is true but (R) is false.
(D) If (A) is false but (R) is true.

10. Assertion (A) : If a and b are integers and roots of
x
2
+ ax + b = 0 are rational then these roots must be
integers.
Reason (R) : If a and b are integers then roots of
x
2
+ ax + b = 0 are necessarily integers.

11. Assertion (A) : The coefficient of the term of
independent of x in the expansion of
n
x
x |
.
|

\
|
+ + 6
9
is
! !
)! 2 ( 3
n n
n
n
.
Reason (R) : The coefficient of x
r
in the expansion
of (1 + x)
n
is
|
|
.
|

\
|
r
n
.

12. Assertion (A) : If in a triangle ABC
sin
2
A + sin
2
B + sin
2
C = 2, then one of the angles must
be 90.
Reason (R) : In any triangle ABC
cos 2A + cos 2B + cos 2C = 1 4 cos A cos B cos C

13. Assertion (A) : P is a point (a, b, c). Let A, B, C be the
images of P in yz, zx and xy planes respectively then
equation of the plane passing through the points A, B
and C is
a
x
+
b
y
+
c
z
= 1.
Reason (R) : The image of a point P in a plane is the
foot of the perpendicular draw from P on the plane.

This section contains 2 paragraphs; each has 3 multiple
choice questions. (Questions 14 to 19) Each question
has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY
ONE is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet
against the question number of that question. +4 marks
will be given for each correct answer and 1 mark for
each wrong answer.

Passage # 1 (Ques. 14 to 16)
f(x) = sin {cot
1
(x + 1)} cos (tan
1
x)
a = cos tan
1
sin cot
1
x
b = cos (2 cos
1
x + sin
1
x)
14. The value of x for which f(x) = 0 is
(A) 1/2 (B) 0
(C) 1/2 (D) 1

15. If f(x) = 0 then a
2
is equal to
(A) 1/2 (B) 2/3
(C) 5/9 (D) 9/5

16. If a
2
= 26/51, then b
2
is equal to
(A) 1/25 (B) 24/25
(C) 25/26 (D) 50/51

Passage # 2 (Ques. 17 to 19)
Let a > 0, a 1 and x > 0.
(i) log
a
x > 0, a > 1 x > 0, a > 1
(ii) log
a
x > 0, 0 < a < 1 0 < x < 1, 0 < a < 1
(iii) log
a
x < 0, a > 1 0 < x < 1, a > 1
(iv) log
a
x < 0, 0 < a < 1 x > 1, 0 < a < 1

17. The solution set of x log
1/10
(x
2

+ x + 1) > 0 is
(A) ( , 1) (B) (0, 1)
(C) (1, ) (D) |
.
|

\
|
,
10
1


18. The solution set of
log
3

8 12
12 5
x
x
+ log
1/3
x 0 is
(A) |
.
|

\
|
3
2
,
12
5
(B)
(

\
|
2
1
,
12
5

(C)
(

\
|
3
1
,
12
5
(D) |
.
|

\
|
2
1
,
12
5

19. The solution set of
1 1
3
10
log
1
2
9 / 1
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|

x x is
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 77 JANUARY 2011
(A) |
.
|

3
1
, 0 |
.
|

\
|
3
10
, 3 (B) (, )
(C) |
.
|

\
|
3
1
, 0 (, ) (D) (3, ) (, )

This section contains 3 questions (Questions 20 to 22).
Each question contains statements given in two
columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,
C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements (P,
Q, R, S) in Column II. The answers to these questions
have to be appropriately bubbled as illustrated in the
following example. If the correct matches are A-P, A-S,
B-Q, B-R, C-P, C-Q and D-S, then the correctly
bubbled 4 4 matrix should be as follows :
A
B
C
D
P
Q R S
S
P
P
P Q R
R
R
Q
Q
S
S
P Q R S

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question
number of that question in section-II. + 6 marks will be
given for complete correct answer and No Negative
marks for wrong answer. However, 1 mark will be
given for a correctly marked answer in any row.
20. Normals at P, Q, R are drawn to y
2
= 4x which
intersect at (3, 0). Then :
Column-I Column-II
(A) Area of PQR (P) 2
(B) Radius of circumcircle (Q)
2
5

of PQR
(C) Centroid of PQR (R) |
.
|

\
|
0 ,
2
5

(D) Circumcentre of PQR (S) |
.
|

\
|
0 ,
3
2


21. Value of
Column-I Column-II
(A) 4 (
4

4
) (P) 0
if + i, 0
is a root of z
5
= 1
(B)
2
1
2
z
+ + |2 z|
2
(Q) 1
if z z = 1
(C) w z z + + ) (
2
1
2 1
(R) 4
+ w z z ) (
2
1
2 1
+
if w =
2 1
z z , |z
1
| = 3,
|z
2
| = 1
(D) z
1
z
2
+ z
3
z
4
if (S) 10
z
1
, z
2
, z
3
, z
4
represent
vertices of a parallelogram

22. Column-I Column-II
(A) Centroid of the triangle (P) (1, 6, 5)
with vertices A(2, 3, 7),
B(6, 7, 5), C(1, 2, 3)
(B) Mid-point of the line (Q) (3, 4, 5)
joining the points
A(7, 9, 11) and B(5, 3, 1)
(C) A point on the line (R) (3, 3, 2)

2
x
=
3
y
=
5
z
, at a
distance 2 from the origin
(D) Coordinates of the point (S) ( 38 / 4 , 38 / 6 ,
dividing the join (5, 5, 0) 38 / 10 )
and (0, 0, 5) in the ratio 2 : 3.







































William Bottke at Cornell University in the US
has calculated that at least 900 asteroids of a
kilometre or more across regularly sweep
across Earth's path.
The Dutch astronomer Christiaan Huygens
(1629 - 1695) drew Mars using an advanced
telescope of his own design. He recorded a
large, dark spot on Mars, probably Syrtis
Major. He noticed that the spot returned to the
same position at the same time the next day,
and calculated that Mars has a 24 hour period.
(It is actually 24 hours and 37 minutes)
Space debris travels through space at over
18,000 mph.
The nucleus of Comet Halley is approximately
16x8x8 kilometers. Contrary to prior
expectations, Halley's nucleus is very dark: its
albedo is only about 0.03 making it darker than
coal and one of the darkest objects in the solar
system.
A car travelling at a constant speed of 60 miles
per hour would take longer than 48 million
years to reach the nearest star (other than our
Sun), Proxima Centauri. This is about 685,000
average human lifetimes.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 78 JANUARY 2011










































PHYSICS

1. Define the term electric dipole moment. Is it a scalar
or a vector quantity ?

2. The variation of potential difference V with length l
in case of two potentiometers P and Q is as shown.
Which one of these two will you prefer for
comparing e.m.f's of two primary cells ?


P
Q
l
V


3. Arrange the given electromagnetic radiations in the
descending order of their frequencies : Infra-red,
X-rays, Ultraviolet and Gamma rays.

4. The de Broglie wavelengths, associated with a
proton and a neutron, are found to be equal. Which
of the two has a higher value for kinetic energy ?

5. Carbon and silicon are known to have similar lattice
structures. However, the four bonding electrons of
carbon are present in second orbit while those of
silicon are present in its third orbit . How does this
difference result in a difference in their electrical
conductivities ?

6. An unknown input (A) and the input (B) shown here,
are used as the two inputs in a NAND gate. The
output Y, has the form shown below. Identify the
intervals over which the input A must be low.

B
Y
O O
O O
0 L
1 L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5


General Instructions : Physics & Chemistry
Time given for each subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 70 for each.
All questions are compulsory.
Marks for each question are indicated against it.
Question numbers 1 to 8 are very short-answer questions and carrying 1 mark each.
Question numbers 9 to 18 are short-answer questions, and carry 2 marks each.
Question numbers 19 to 27 are also short-answer questions, and carry 3 marks each.
Question numbers 28 to 30 are long-answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
Use of calculators is not permitted.

General Instructions : Mathematics
Time given to solve this subject paper is 3 hrs and Max. marks 100.
All questions are compulsory.
The question paper consists of 29 questions divided into three sections A, B and C.
Section A comprises of 10 questions of one mark each.
Section B comprises of 12 questions of four marks each.
Section C comprises of 7 questions of six marks each.
All question in Section A are to be answered in one word, one sentence or as per the exact requirement of the question.
There is no overall choice. However, internal choice has been provided in 4 questions of four marks each and
2 question of six marks each. You have to attempt only one of the alternatives in all such questions.
Use of calculators is not permitted.
MOCK TEST-2
CBSE BOARD PATTERN

CLASS # XII
SUBJECT : PHYSICS , CHEMISTRY & MATHEMATICS
Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 79 JANUARY 2011
7. Does a beam of white light give a spectrum on
passing through a hollow prism ?

8. Why do we prefer a magnifying glass of smaller
focal length ?

9. Write the relation for the force

F acting on a charge
carrier q moving with a velocity

v through a
magnetic field

B in vector notation. Using this


relation, deduce the conditions under which this
force will be (i) maximum (ii) minimum.

10. A galvanometer has a resistance of 30 . It gives full
scale deflection with a current of 2 mA. Calculate
the value of the resistance needed to convert it into
an ammeter of range 0-0.3 A.

11. Two capacitors of capacitance 6 F and 12 F are
connected in series with a battery. The voltage
across the 6 F capacitor is 2 V. Compute the total
battery voltage.
OR
A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates
has a capacitance of 8 pF. The separation between
the plates is now reduced by half and the space
between them is filled with a medium of dielectric
constant 5. Calculate the value of capacitance of the
capacitor in the second case.

12. What do the terms depletion region and barrier
potential mean for a p-n junction ?


13. We do not choose to transmit an audio signal by just
directly converting it to an e.m. wave of the same
frequency. Give two reasons for the same.


14. Define the term Activity of a radioactive substance.
State its SI unit.
Two different radioactive elements with half lives T
1

and T
2
have N
1
and N
2
(undecayed) atoms
respectively present at a given instant. Determine the
ratio of their activities at this instant.

15 Draw the block diagram of a communication system.


16. State Bohr's postulate for the permitted orbits for
the electron in a hydrogen atom.
Use this postulate to prove that the circumference of
the n
th
permitted orbit for the electron can contain
exactly n wave lengths of the de Broglie wavelength
associated with the electron in that orbit.
17. Four double convex lenses with the following
specifications are available.

cm 2
cm 2
cm 5
cm 10
cm 5
cm 10
cm 100
cm 100
D
C
B
A
Aperture length Focal Lens

Which two of the given four lenses should be
selected as the objective and eyepiece to construct
an astronomical telescope and why ? What will be
the magnifying power and normal length of the
telescope tube so constructed ?

18. In Young's experiment on interference, what shall
happen if monochromatic source is replaced by a
source of white light ?

19. Using Biot-Savart law, derive an expression for the
intensity of magnetic field at a point near a long
current carrying straight conductor.

20. A copper circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is
placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T normal
to the plane of the coil. A current of 5.0 A is flowing
through the coil. Calculate :
(a) total torque acting on the coil
(b) average force acting on each electron in the coil.
Given : Free electron density in copper = 10
29
m
3

and cross-sectional area of copper wire = 10
5
m
2
.
OR
A galvanometer with a coil of resistance 12 shows
a full scale deflection for a current of 2.5
mA.Calculate the value of the resistance required to
convert it into (a) an ammeter of range 0 to 7.5 A and
(b) a voltmeter of range 0 to 10 V. Draw the
diagrams to show how you will connect this
resistance to the galvanometer in each case.

21. A 10 m long wire of uniform cross-section and 20
resistance is used in a potentiometer. The wire is
connected in series with a battery of 5V along with
an external resistance of 480 . If an unknown e.m.f.
E is balanced at 6.0 m length of the wire, calculate :
(i) the potential gradient of the potentiometer wire
(ii) the value of unknown e.m.f. E.

22. Define the term electrical resistivity of a material.
Write its S.I. units. Derive an expression for the
resistivity of a metal in terms of number density and
mass of free electrons present in it.

23. Devices A and B are connected independently to a
variable frequency voltage source as shown. The
current in A is ahead of the applied voltage whereas
it lags behind the voltage in B.


A
~
B
~

(i) Identify the devices A and B
(ii) How will the current in each of these devices
change on decreasing the frequency of the applied
voltage ?
Give reasons to support your answer in each case.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 80 JANUARY 2011
24 Using a suitable combination from a NOR, an OR
and a NOT gate, draw circuits to obtain the truth
table given below :

0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
Y B A

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
Y B A

(i) (ii)

25. Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of (i) an
electron (in the hydrogen atom) moving with a speed
of 1/100 of the speed of light in vacuum and (ii) a
ball of radius 5 mm and mass 3 10
2
kg moving
with a speed of 100 ms
1
. Hence show that the wave
nature of matter is important at the atomic level but
is not really relevant at the macroscopic level.

26. The spectrum of a star in the visible and the
ultraviolet region was observed and the wavelength
of some of the lines that could be identified were
found to be:
824 , 970 , 1120 , 2504 , 5173 , 6100
Which of these lines cannot belong to
hydrogen atom spectrum ? Given Rydberg constant
R = 1.03 10
7
m
1
and
R
1
= 970 . Support your
answer with suitable calculations

27. Show that central maximum is twice as wide as the
other maxima and the pattern becomes narrower as
the width of the slit is increased.

28. The given circuit diagram shows a series LCR
circuit connected to a variable frequency 230 V
source

40
~
80
5.0 H
230 V

(a) Determine the source frequency which drives the
circuit in resonance.
(b) Obtain the impedance of the circuit and the
amplitude of current at the resonating frequency.
(c) Determine the rms potential drops across the
three elements of the circuit.
(d) How do you explain the observation that the
algebraic sum of the voltages across the three
elements obtained in (c) is greater than the
supplied voltage ?
OR
The primary coil of an ideal step-up transformer
as 100 turns and the transformation ratio is also
100. The input voltage and power are 220 V and
1100 W respectively. Calculate :
(i) number of turns in the secondary
(ii) the current in the primary
(iii) voltage across the secondary
(iv) the current in the secondary
(v) power in the secondary.

29. What is a dielectric ? Why does the capacitance of a
parallel plate capacitor increase on introduction of a
dielectric in between its two plates ? Derive an
expression for the capacitance of such a capacitor
having two identical plates each of area A and
separated by distance x. The space between the
plates has a medium of dielectric constant k.
OR
Derive an expression for the energy stored in a
parallel plate capacitor with air as the medium
between its plates.
Air is now replaced by a dielectric medium of
dielectric constant k. How does it change the total
energy of the capacitor if
(i) the capacitor remains connected to the same
battery ?
(ii) the capacitor is disconnected from the battery ?

30. Discuss the phenomenon of refraction through a
prism and derive the relation
=
2
sin
2
sin
A
A
m
|
.
|

\
| +
.
Where A is the angle of prism, is the refractive
index of the material of the prism and
m
is the
angle of minimum deviation.
OR
With the help of a labelled ray diagram, show the
image formation by a compound microscope. Derive
an expression for its magnifying power.

CHEMISTRY

1. Why PCl
5
is found but NCl
5
do not ?

2. Give two ores of aluminium ?

3 Define Enzymes .

4. What is the coordination number of atoms in BCC,
HCP and CCP and simple cubic lattices ?

5. The rate constant of a zero order reaction is
0.25 Mh
1
. What will be the initial concentration of
the reactant if after 30 minutes its concentration is
0.075 M ?
6. How much electricity in terms of Faraday is required
to produce 20 g of Ca from molten CaCl
2
?

7. Why is adsorption always exothermic ?
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 81 JANUARY 2011

8. Which reagents are required for the one step
conversion of chlorobenzene into toluene ? Also
name the reaction.

9. Why Carbon monoxide is poisonous ?

10. What are the different oxidation states exhibited by
lanthanides ?

11. Explain baeyer's process to remove impurities in
metallurgy of aluminium ?

12. Explain the following terms in brief
(i) Colligative property; (ii) Reverse osmosis

13. What is known as 'activation energy' ? How is the
activation energy affected by
(i) the use of a catalyst and
(ii) a rise in temperature ?

14. The rate of a particular reaction doubles when
temperature changes from 27C to 37C.
Calculate the activation energy of such reaction.

15. In the button cell, widely used in watches and other
devices, the following reaction takes place :
Zn (s) + Ag
2
O(s) + H
2
O(l)
Zn
2+
(aq) + 2 Ag (s) + 2 OH (aq)
Determine E and
r
G for the reaction
Given :
0
Ag / Ag
E + = + 0.80 V,
0
Zn / Zn
2 E + =0.76 V
16. What are fuel cells ? Write the electrode reactions of
a fuel cell which uses the reaction of hydrogen with
oxygen.

17. Identify X, Y and Z in the following reactions :
C
6
H
5
Cl
O Cu
2
3
NH
X
HCl and NaNO
2
Y
Warm
KI
Z.
18. How are the following conversions carried out ?
(i) Ethyl bromide to butan -1-ol
(ii) Propanone to 2-methylpropan-2-ol.

19. Describe the preparation of potassium dichromate
from chromite ore. What is effect of increasing pH
on solution of potassium dichromate ?

20. Give IUPAC names of :
(i) [CoCl
2
(en)
2
] Cl
(ii) K
2
[Zn(OH)
4
]
(iii) [Co(NH
3
)
4
(H
2
O) Cl] Cl
2


21. What are polymers. Give the structure of terylene
and Nylon 6, 6.
22. What are dissachharides. Give three examples and
their monosaccharide unit -

23. What are antibiotics. Give types with examples.

24. An element having atomic mass 52, occurs in body
centred cubic (bcc) structure with a cell edge of 288
pm. The density of the element is 7.2 g cm
3
.
Evaluate Avogadro's number.

25. (a) The vapour pressure of water is 12.3 kPa at 300
K. Calculate vapour pressure of 1 molal solution of a
solute in it.
(b) Calculate the mass of a nonvolatile solute
(molecular mass 40) which should be dissolved in
114 g octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%.

26. (a) What are micelles ? How do they differ from
ordinary colloidal particles ? Give two examples of
micelles forming substances
(b) State Hardy Schulze rule.
(c) State the principle of electrodialysis.

27. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order
of their property as indicated :
(a)Acetaldehyde, Acetone, Di-tert-butyl ketone,
Methyl tert-butyl ketone (reactivity towards HCN)
(b)CH
3
CH
2
CH(Br)COOH, CH
3
CH(Br)CH
2
COOH,
(CH
3
)
2
CHCOOH, CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
COOH (acid
strength)
(c)Benzoic acid, 4-Nitrobenzoic acid, 3,
4-Dinitrobenzoic acid, 4-Methoxybenzoic acid (acid
strength)

28. If the starting material for the manufacture of
silicones is RSiCl
3
, write the structure of the product
formed ?

29. An aromatic compound 'A' gives ammonia gas on
boiling with caustic potash. On heating with P
2
O
5
A
give B which on further reduction with sodium /
alcohol C forms a base which reacts with HNO
2

giving off nitrogen and yielding alcohol C. The
alcohol C can be oxidised to benzoic acid. Give the
structures of A, B, C.
30. Write chemical tests to distinguish between formic
acid and acetic acid.

MATHEMATICS

Section A

1. Find trace of matrix A =
(
(
(

2 4 6
8 5 7
5 1 14


2. Find x, y so that

(
(

+ +
4 0
2 10
2
y y x
=
(

+
y y
x
5 0
3 4 3
2

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 82 JANUARY 2011
3. Evaluate


80 cos 80 sin
10 cos 10 sin


4. If e
x
+ e
y
= e
x + y
then prove that
dx
dy
=
) 1 (
) 1 (
+

x y
y x
e e
e e
.

5. If f(x) =
3 2
2 3

x
x
then find f(f(x)).

6. Evaluate

|
.
|

\
|

dx
x
x
e
x
cos 1
sin 1


7. Solve : cos
2
x
dx
dy
+ y = tan x

8. Show that ( a
r
b
r
)
2
=
b b b a
b a a a
r r r
r
r
r r r
. .
. .


9. Find the area of the parallelogram determined by the
vectors i

+ 2 j

+ 3 k

and 3i

2 j

+ k

.

10. Find the angle between the line
r
r
= ( i

+ 2 j

) + ( i

+ k

) and the plane


r
r
. (2i

+ k

) = 4.

Section B


11. Using properties of determinant prove that
c b a a b
a c b a c
b c c b a
+ +
+ +
+ +

= 2 (a + b) (b + c) (c + a)

12. An integer is chosen at random from first two
hundred natural number. What is the probability that
the integer chosen is divisible by 6 or 8?
OR
A candidate has to reach the examination centre in
time. Probability of him going by bus or scooter or
by other means of transport are
10
3
,
10
1
,
5
3

respectively. The probability that he will be late is
4
1

and
3
1
respectively, if he travels by bus or scooter.
But he reaches in time if the uses any mode of
transport. He reached late at the centre. Find the
probability that he travelled by bus.

13. Differentiate tan
1

(
(

+
x
x 1 1
2
w.r.t. tan
1
x, x 0.

14. If x = a |
.
|

\
|
+
t
t
1
, y = a |
.
|

\
|

t
t
1
then prove that
dx
dy
=
y
x

OR
If x
p
y
q
= (x + y)
p+q
, prove that
dx
dy
=
x
y



15. Using Langrange's theorem, prove that

b
a b
< log (b/a) <
a
a b
where 0 < a < b.

16. For what choice of a, b function
f(x) =

> +

c x b ax
c x x
,
,
2
is differentiable at x = c.

17. Show that f : N N defined by
f(n) =

+
even n
n
odd n
n
,
2
,
2
1
is many-one onto function.

18. Evaluate

dx
x
x
4 sin
sin


19. Evaluate { }

+ d cot tan
OR
Evaluate

+
+ +
) 5 )( 3 (
) 4 )( 1 (
2 2
2 2
x x
x x
dx

20. The normal lines to a given curve at each point pass
through (2, 0). The curve passes through (2, 3).
Formulate the differential equation and hence find
out the equation of the curve.

21. Find and
if (2i

+ 6 j

+ 27 k

) ( i

+ j

+ k

) = 0
r


22. Find the equation of the plane passing through the
intersection of the planes 4x y + z = 10 and
x + y z = 4 and parallel to the line with direction
ratios proportional to 2, 1, 1. Find also the
perpendicular distance of (1, 1, 1) from this plane.

OR
Find the vector equation of the line parallel to the line
5
1 x
=
2
3 y
=
4
1 + z
and passing through (3, 0, 4).
Also find the distance between these two lines.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 83 JANUARY 2011
Section C

23. Evaluate

b
a
dx x sin as limit of sums.
(Using by first principal method of integration)

24. A bag contains 4 white balls and 2 black balls.
Another contains 9 white balls and 5 black balls. If
one ball is drawn from each bag. Find the probability
that
(A) both are white
(B) one is white and one is black.

25. Sketch the region common to the circle
x
2
+ y
2
= 16 and the parabola x
2
= 6y. Also, find the
area of the region using integration.

26. Find the shortest distance between the lines whose
vector equations are
r
r
= ( i

+2 j

+ 3 k

) + (2 i

+3 j

+ 4 k

) and,
r
r
=(2 i

+4 j

+ 5 k

) + (4i

+6 j

+ 8 k

)

27. An oil company requires 12,000; 20,000 and 15,000
barrels of high-grade, medium grade and low grade
oil, respectively. Refinery A produces 100, 300 and
200 barrels per day of high grade, medium grade and
low grade oil, respectively. While refinery B
produces 200, 400 and 100 barrels per day of high
grade, medium grade and low grade oil, respectively.
If refinery A costs Rs.400 per day and refinery B
costs Rs.300 per day to operate, how many days
should each be run to minimize costs while satisfying
requirements.

28. If A =
(
(
(

3 2 1
1 1 2
1 1 1
, then find A
1
.Using A
1
, solve
the following system of linear equations
x + y + z = 3
2x y + z = 2
x 2y + 3z = 2

OR

If A =
(
(
(


7 3 2
1 3 1
11 5 4
, then find A
1
. Using A
1
,
solve the following system of linear equations
4x 5y 11z = 12
x 3y + z = 1
2x +3y 7z = 2


29. Show that the volume of largest cone that can be
inscribed in a sphere of radius R is
27
8
of the volume
of sphere.
OR
Find the maximum and minimum values of
f(x) = sin x +
2
2 cos x
, x
(


2
, 0













































Chemistry Facts
1. The element with the lowest boiling point is
also helium at -452.07 degrees Fahrenheit (-
268.93 degrees Celsius.
2. The word "atom" comes from the Greek word
atomos, meaning "uncut."
3. In 1964, scientists in Russia discovered element
104, and suggested the name Kurchatovium
and symbol Ku in honor of Igor Vasilevich
Kurchatov. Then in 1969, scientists in the U.S.
also found element 104, and propsed the name
Rutherfordium (symbol Rf), in the honor of the
New Zealand physicist Ernest R. Rutherford.
To get the names past the I.U.P.A.C., it won
with rutherfordium.
4. The first and relatively pure atom of tantalum
was produced by von Bolton in 1907.
5. Andres Manual del Rio discovered what we
call today vanadium. He called it
panchromium, and then changed it to
erythronium (red), after noting that upon
heating it turned red. In 1831, Nils Gabriel
Sefstrm (a Swedish chemist) was working
with some iron ores and this matter was lead to
honor the Northern Germanic tribes' goddess
Vanadis due to its inspiration in multi-colors. In
the same year, Friedrich Whler came into
posession of del Rio's erythronium, and
confirmed it to be vanadium, after Vanadis.
The name Vanadium is now being used instead
of del Rio's erythronium.
6. Hafnium was named after the city of
Copenhagen, Denmark.
7. The heaviest type of lepton is the tau.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 84 JANUARY 2011







































































































Performance Analysis: Key to Success

a2zFeedback Technology
Unique Technology based performance analysis system



Taking tests are not enough for preparation of any competitive exam. Detailed analysis of performance can go long way in helping
you improve scores.
The analysis should point out following key points to improve:
What should be your preparation strategy?
What is your relative performance among the peer group?
Which subject and which topic you required to improve upon?
What are the skills you need improvement?
How can you direct your efforts in the right path to excel?
To reveal these facts you require a complete support system to help you in all round preparation.
a2zfeeback technology is the unique performance analysis system which provides critical feedback of students performance. It
highlights students weakness and strength using scientific and statistical technique. a2zfeedback is a part of learning outcome
management system (a2zLOMS) which is an enhanced technology driven solution to strategically identify the learning gaps and
suggests various corrective measures to fulfill the actual learning.
a2zfeedback provides:
a. Question-wise personalized and relative performance report
b. Skill-wise personalized and relative performance report
c. Topic wise performance analysis indicating the knowledge level of the student viz. Danger Zone, Normal Zone or Safe Zone
d. Identifies students strong and weak areas on the basis of subject knowledge and exam taking skills
e. Critical comment suggesting the course of action to further improve your performance
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 85 JANUARY 2011









PHYSICS

1. A straight line passing through pole and centre of
curvature is called principal axis.

2. Frequency

3. (i) N/C (ii) Coul-meter

4. It states about conservation of energy. According to
it direction of induced current would be such that it
opposes the cause of change of magnetic flux.

5. E
0
= CB
0

B
0
=
C
E
0
=
8
6
10 3
10 3

= 0.01 T
6. The charge of the excess charge carriers gets
balanced by an equal and opposite charge of the
ionized cores in the lattice.

7. We have

= |
.
|

\
|

=
= |
.
|

\
|
=

4
1
. const
1

2
1
. const E and
4
3
. const
2
1

1
1
. const E
2 2
2
2 2
1 2

Ratio = 3 : 1

8. Infrared radiations get readily absorbed by water
molecules in most materials. This increases their
thermal motion and heats them up.
(i) visible light (ii) Microwaves

9. Focal length do not depend upon the medium in
which the mirror is held. So focal length will not
change.

10. As width of central maxima,
c
=
a
f 2

So,
c

a
1
,
c
f &
c
thus,
(a) width increases with decrease in a
(b) width increases with increase in f
(c) width decreases with decrease in
11. 3nC 2nC
1nC
2nC
2 m
r

r =
2
2
= 1 m
V
centre
=
r
k
[2 + 1 2 3] 10
9

=
1
10 9
9

[2 10
9
]
= 18 volt

12. Blue 6 (A)
Black 0 (B)
yellow 4 (C)
R = AB 10
C
= 60 10
4

i =
R
V
=
4
10 60
30


= 0.5 10
4

= 0.05 mA

13. Microwave In microwave oven
Ultraviolet rays To sterlizing sergical instruments
Gamma rays In medical science.

14. Instantaneous Activity = R =
dt
dN
= N

dt
dR
=
dt
d
(N) =
dt
dN

= ( N) =
2
N
=
2
2 / 1
2
log
|
|
.
|

\
|
T
e
N

dt
dR

2
2 / 1
) T (
1




MOCK TEST-1 (SOLUTION)

MOCK TEST 1 PUBLISHED IN DECEMBER ISSUE
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 86 JANUARY 2011
15. Energy of a photon of the incident radiation
=

hc
=
19 9
8 34
10 6 . 1 10 300
10 3 10 4 . 6


eV = 4eV
This being less than the work function of Mo, there
would be no photo-emission from Mo.

16. eV
s
= h w
e (V
2
V
1
) = h (
2

1
)
or V
2
V
1
=
e
h
(
2

1
)
V
2
V
1
=
19
34
10 6 . 1
10 4 . 6

(8 4) 10
15
volt = 16 volt

17. We have

m
hc

= E
g

or
m
=
g
E
hc


18. LOS line of sight
Waves used space waves
It is both-the height of transmitting antenna as well
as the height of receiving antenna that affects the
range of the mode of communication.

19. I
max
= (
1
I +
2
I )
2
= ( I + I I + )
2

= I
2
1 1
(
(

+ +
I
I

= I
2
2
1
1 1
(
(
(

|
.
|

\
|
+ +
I
I
= I
2
2
1 1
(

|
.
|

\
|
+ +
I
I

= I
2
2
2
(


+
I
I
= I.4
2
4
1
(


+
I
I
= 4I
(


+
I
I
2
1 4I
I
min
= (
1
I
2
I )
2
= ( I I I + )
2
= I
2
1 1
(
(

+
I
I

= I
2
2
1
1 1
(
(
(

|
.
|

\
|
+
I
I
= I
2
2
1 1
(

|
.
|

\
|
+
I
I

= I
2
2
|
.
|

\
|
I
I
= I.
2
2
4
) (
I
I

=
I
I
4
) (
2


20.

q
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
r

(a) r > R

0
.


in
q
ds E
E. 4r
2
=
0

q


2
0
4 r
q
E

=
(b) Q In r < R, q
in
= 0
E = 0

21. i =
eq
R
V



5
10
5
10
10 10
10 V

22. (i) W = MB (cos
1
cos
2
)
= MB (cos0 cos 180)
= 2 MB
(ii) W = MB (cos
1
cos
2
)
= MB (cos0 cos 90)
= MB
23. = BA
=
dt
Nd

= N
t
d
(BA)
= NA
dt
d
B
0
cos t
t B NA = sin
0


24. 0.5 =
2 2
) (
12
L R +
. (i)
and tan =
R
X
L

tan /3 =
R
L
(ii)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 87 JANUARY 2011
OR
F = i B l = |
.
|

\
|
R
B v l
Bl =
R
B v
2 2
l


25. Total B.E. of parent Nucleus
= 7.8 235 MeV = 1833 MeV
Total B.E. of daughter nucleus
= 7.835 231 MeV = 1809.9 MeV
Total B.E. of -particle
= 7.07 4 MeV = 28.28 MeV
Increase in B.E. after the reaction
= [(180.9 + 28.28) (1833)] MeV = 5.18 MeV
This is the energy released in the reaction, since it
assumed to be taken up totally by the -particle,

2
1
mv
2
= 5.18 1.6 10
13
J
v
2
=
68 . 6
2 . 3 18 . 5
10
14
m
2
s
2

= 48 . 2 10
7
ms
1



1.58 10
7
ms
1


26. The modulation index () for an AM wave equals
the ratio of the peak value of the modulating signal
(A
m
) to the peak value of the carrier wave
(A
c
) =
c
m
A
A

Given that
(

(
=
+ =
m c
m c
A A b
A A a
and


(

(
=
+
=
2

2
b a
A and
b a
A
m c

=
b a
b a
+



27. Postulates of Bohr's Model (i) In atom, electron
moves round the nucleus in stable orbits. Attraction
force b/w nucleus and electron given the required
centripetal force for electron
mass of electron = m
charge on electron = e
atomic no. = z
radii of orbit = r
speed of electron = v
Centripetal force = Attraction force

r
mv
2
=
2
2
r
kze


r
kze
mv
2
2
=
(ii) In stable orbits electron does not emit any
radiation. But at jumping from one orbit to another.
It emits or absorbs energy.
This energy equals difference of energy of two
energy levels.
E = E
1
E
2

h = E
2
E
1

h = Plank const.
= frequency of radiation
(iii) Electron moves only in those orbits where
angular momentum of electrons
mvr =
2
nh

n = principle energy level
= 1,2,3,
Hydrogen spectrum
According to Bohr's theory
radii of n
th
orbit =
2 2
2 2
4 kme
h n


velocity of electron v =
nh
kme
2 2
4

total energy in n
th
orbit E
n
=
2 2 2
0
2
8

n h
me


hence
2
1

n
E
n

2
'
n
R
E
n
=
while electrons jumps from one orbit to another
E = E
2
E
1

E = R'
|
|
.
|

\
|
2
1
2
2
1

1
n n

hc
= R'
|
|
.
|

\
|
2
1
2
2
1

1
n n

1
=
hc
R'

|
|
.
|

\
|
2
1
2
2
1

1
n n

1
= R'
|
|
.
|

\
|
2
1
2
2
1

1
n n

Hydrogen Spectrum
Different series
(1) Lymann - (Ultraviolet)
(2) Balmer - (Visible)
(3) Paschen - (Infra Red)
(4) Brackett - (Infra Red)
(5) Pfund - (Infra Red)
(6) Hemfry - (Infra Red)
Shortcomings of Bohr's Model
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 88 JANUARY 2011
(1) Applicable only for atoms having one electrons
and not applicable for others.
(2) Nucleous is not stable.
(3) Quantisation of angular momentum is not
explained
(4) Orbits of electrons are elliptical, not circular.
(5) Does not explain Stork's and Zeeman's effect.

28. (a) The sources of light, which emit light waves of
same frequency with constant phase difference. That
is phase difference do not change with time.
Interference pattern is not observed as two
physically different light sources can never be
coherent.
(b) For bright fringe, x = n ; n = 0, 1,2,3,
or
D
yd
= n
or y =
d
D n

So, bright fringes are obtained at
y = 0,
d
D
,
d
D 2
..
For dark fringes , x = (2n + 1)
2

; n = 0,1,2,3 ..
or
D
yd
= (2n + 1)
2


or y =
d
D n
2
) 1 2 ( +

So, dark fringes are obtained at
y =
d
D
2

,
d
D
2
3
,
d
D
2
5
.
So, dark fringes are obtained at
y =
d
D
,
d
D
2
3
,
d
D
2
5

And the distance between two consecutive bright or
dark fringe i.e, fringe width, =
d
D
.
OR
(a) In the figure, AB is object placed beyond F
perpendicular to the principal axis of a concave lens.
A' B' is the erect, virtual and diminished image.

B
A
A' P
v
f
u
c F

ABC A' B' C

' ' B A
AB
=
C B
BC
'
(1)
PCF A' B' F

' ' B A
PC
=
F B
CF
'
(2)
From Eq. (1) & (2)

C B
BC
'
=
F B
CF
'

v
u

=
) (

v f
f

or uf uv = vf
or
v
1

f
1
=
u
1

or
v
1

u
1
=
f
1
proved
(a) P = P
1
+ P
2
= + 10 5 = + 5D
(b) f =
P
1
=
5
1
m = 20 cm.
m =
u
v

= 2 v = 2u
u 2
1

u
1
=
20
1


u 2
1
=
20
1

u = 10 cm.

29. Step transfer works on the principle of mutual
induction .


Secondary coil
Primary coil

V
p
= N
p

dt
d

V
s
= N
s

dt
d


p
s
p
s
N
N
V
V
=
For step-up transformer,
p
s
N
N
> 1
Flux does not change in the case of d.c. so no emf is
induced.
OR
Principle : A.C. Generator works on the principle of
E.M.I.
Working : When coil is rotated in the magnetic field
(produced in the poles), magnetic flux linking with
the coil change.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 89 JANUARY 2011


N S


= BA cos t
=
dt
Nd
= N
dt
d
(BA cos t)
= NB sin t.

30. U =
a
kq
2
12 +
2
2
a
kq
12 +
3
2
a
kq
4
or
Total Electric flux from the surface
=


ds E.
=

cos Eds
=


cos
4
2
0
r
qds

=
0
4
q

2
cos
r
ds

=
0
4
q
4 =
0

q


CHEMISTRY

1. Holme signal is mixture of calcium carbide (CaC
2
)
and calcium phosphide (Ca
3
P
2
)

2. (a) Copper Pyrite or Chalcopyrite CuFeS
2

(b) Copper glance Cu
2
S
(c) malachite CuCo
3
. Cu (OH)
2

(d) cuprite Cu
2
O

3. Glycine (H
2
N CH
2
COOH) is simplest amino
acid.
4.

t
1/2
[A
0
]


5. E
cell
= 1.229 V

6. (a) The conc. above which associative colloid is
formed is called CMC.
(b) Emulsifier stabalise the emulsion soap or
detergents

7. Fluoboric acid

8.
CH
3
CH
2
CH CH
2
OH + CH
3
CH
2
I
CH
3


9. Structure of N
2
O
5
is


O
O
N O N
O
O


10. d-block elements are used as catalyst due to two
reasons
(A) They show variable oxidation states and hence
they are converted to unstable intermediate
species while they convert reactants to products
this reaction occurs via a path of lower
activation energy.
(B) They adsorb reactant molecules on their surface
which provide a suitable surface area for the
reaction to occur.

11. Small amount of very pure titanium or zirconium
metal can be prepared by this method. Impure metal
is heated in an evacuated vessel with I
2
. TiI
4
or ZrI
4

is formed which. vaporizes leaving behind
impurities. The gaseous MI
4
is decomposed on a
white hot tungsten filament.
Zr + 2 I
2

K 870
ZrI
4

K 2075
Zr + 2I
2

Ti + 2I
2

K 525
TiI
4

K 1675
Ti + 2I
2

12. Rate constant can be defined as rate of chemical
reaction when conc. of all the reactants become
unity Factors on which it depends
(a) Nature of reactants
(b) Temperature
(c) Catalyst

13. I
st
Method : Given K = 2.303
t
1/2
=
K
3 . 0 303 . 2

=
303 . 2
3 . 0 303 . 2
= 0.3 sec.
t
90
=
3
10
t
1/2

=
3
10
0.3 = 1 sec

q

ds

E

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 90 JANUARY 2011
II method
K =
t
303 . 2
ln
|
|
.
|

\
|
x a
a
0
0

2.303 =
90
t
303 . 2
ln
10
100

t
90
= 1 sec

14. (i) N Bromo succinimide
(ii) sodium acetylide H C
+
Na C



15. A = Cresol; B = Benzyl alcohol.

16. (i) 4-Methylhex-2-en-3-ol
(ii) 4-chloro-4-phenyl-1-butanol

17. Factual

18. (i) A = B = ;
SO
3
H


19. The steady decrease in the size of lanthanide ions
(M
3+
) with the increase in atomic number is called
Lanthanide contraction.

Cause of Lanthanide Contractions :
As the atomic number increases due to addition of
protons nuclear charge increases. And in case of
lanthanides electrons are filled in 4f orbital which
have poorest screening effect. Thus the increased
nuclear charge occurs much on 5d and 6s shell and
the electron cloud shrinks. This results in gradual
decrease in size of lanthanides with increase in
atomic number.
20.
) s 4 d 3 (
2 8
Ni =
3d
8
4s
2
4p



) s 4 d 3 (
2
0 8
Ni
+
=
3d
8
4s
0
4p


[NiCl
4
]
2
=

x x x x x x x x
Cl Cl Cl Cl
sp
3

since Cl is weak ligand, thus, it unable to pair
electrons and hence it is paramagnetic
[Ni(CN)
4
]
2

=

x x x x x x
CN CNCN
dsp
2
x x
CN

Since, CN is strong ligand, thus it able to pair
electrons and hence it is diamagnetic
21. (i) Buna S
CH
2
CH = CH CH
2
CH CH
2

C
6
H
5
( )
n

(ii) Buna N
CH
2
CH = CH CH
2
CH CH
2

CN
( )
n

(iii) Neoprene

CH
2
C = CH CH
2

Cl

( )
n

22. Amino acids can be classified as -
(a) Essential Not produced in body
Ex Lysine, leucine
(b) Semi Essential Partially produced in body
Ex Histidine & Arginine
(c) Non essential Produced in body
Ex Glycine, Alanine
23. Tranquilizers are drugs used to reduce stress. These
are of following types :-
(i) Hypnotic Ex Barbituric acid and it's derivatives
(ii) Non-Hypnotic Ex Chlordiazepoxide,
Meprobamate
24. E
cell
= E
cathode
E
anode

= 0.34 ( 0.25) = +0.59 V
ln K
c
=
059 . 0
n
E
cell

=
059 . 0
2
0.59 = 20
K
c
= 1 10
20

25. (a) Brownian motion : Random movement of
colloidal particles in the medium is called brownian
movement. Due to brownian motion particles
colloide with each other and it imparts stability in
the colloidal solution.
(b) Tyndall effect : Scattering of light when rays
fall on the colloidal particles is called Tyndall effect.
Due to this scattering of light the path of light in the
colloidal solution get illuminated.
Application : colour of sky is blue.
(c) Electrophoresis : Movement of colloidal
particles in the presence of electric field is called
electrophoresis as charge is present on the colloidal
particles and movement of particles takes place
toward opposite pole.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 91 JANUARY 2011
26. A is

CH
3
C = CH CH CH
3

CH
3

CH
3

;
B is

CH
3
CH COOH
CH
3

;
C is
CH
3
C COOH
Br
CH
3

;
D is

CH
3
C COOH
OH
CH
3



27. A is (CH
3
)
3
COOH; B is (CH
3
)C NH
2
;
C is (CH
3
)
3
C NC;
D and E are (CH
3
)
3
C OH and (CH
3
)
2
C = CH
2


28. The state of hybridisation of boron in diborane is
sp
3
, In between boron atoms and bridging
hydrogens, three centre two electron bond is present.
The structure of diborane is
x x
x
x
x
x
B
B
H
t

H
t

H
b

H
b
H
t
H
t

H
b
= Bridging hydrogens
H
t
= Terminal hydrogens

29. (i) Rate of rx
n
gives us how fast reactants are
converted into products. Per unit time change in the
conc. of reactants or products. Rate constant is
equals to rate of rx
n
when conc. of all the reactants
become unity or one.
Rate Rate const.
Depends upon Depend upon
- Conc. of reactants - Nature of reactants
- Nature of reactants - Temperature
- Temperature - Catalyst
- Pressure
- Surface area
- Catalyst
- pH of medium
(ii) m =
62
6 . 222

200
1000
= 17.95 m
d =
m
M
+
1000
MM
B

1.072 = M |
.
|

\
|
+
1000
62
95 . 17
1

1.072 = M (0.117)
M = 9.107 mol/lit
(iii) Mixture which boils at const temperature is called
as azeotropic mixture. There are two types of
azeotropes.
(a) maximum boiling point azeotrope The
azeotropic mixture in which boiling point of the
mixture is greater than its constituents.
(b) Minimum boiling point azeotrope The
azeotrope in which B.P. of the mixture is less than
its constituents
30. (a) (i) 3 a = 4r (ii) 2 a = 4r
(iii) a = 2r
(b) The non-stoichiometric point defect responsible
for colour in alkali metal is Metal excess defect in
which alkali halide when heated in metal vapour
results in removal of halogen atom from its position
and in place of halogen e

get situated. This results


in development of colour in the compound.
(direction of dipoles)
Ex [CrO
2
, Fe, Co, Ni etc]
( magnetic dipoles)
Ex MnO, Mn
2
O
3
etc.

MATHEMATICS

Section A


1. A
2 2
=
(

22 21
12 11
a a
a a
a
ij
=
2
3 2 j i

a
11
=
2
3 2
=
2
1
; a
12
=
2
6 2
=
2
4
= 2
a
21
=
2
3 4
=
2
1
; a
22
=
2
6 4
=
2
2
= 1
A =
(

1 2 / 1
2 2 / 1


2. 1 , 2
6
1 3 2
= =
)
`

= +
=
y x
y x
y x
and
5 , 3
29 4 3
2
= =
)
`

= +
=
b a
b a
b a

Hence x = 2, y = 1, a = 3, b = 5
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 92 JANUARY 2011
3. log
a
b . log
b
a 1
=
a
b
log
log

b
a
log
log
1 = 1 1 = 0

4. Let a R
1 + a. a = 1 + a
2
> 0 (a, a) R
1

R
1
is reflexive.
5.
dx
dy
= a
x
ln a + e
x
+ ax
a1
+ x
x
(1 + ln x)

6. We have
I = dx
x
x
x
2 2 2
2 2
2


Putting
x
2
2
2 = t and
x
2
2
2
x
2
2
x
2 (log 2)
3
dx = dt,
we get I =
3
) 2 (log
1
dt =
3
) 2 (log
1
t + C
=
3
) 2 (log
1
x
2
2
2 + C

7. We have,
y = A cos (x + B), (i)
Since the given equation contains two arbitrary
constants, we shall differentiate it two times and we
shall get a differential equation of second order.
Differentiating (i) w.r.t. x, we get

dx
dy
= A sin (x + B) (ii)
Differentiating (ii) w.r.t. x, we get

2
2
dx
y d
= A cos (x + B)

2
2
dx
y d
= y

2
2
dx
y d
+ y = 0, [Using (i)]
which is the required differential equation of the
given family of curves.
8. The vectors a
r
and b
r
are perpendicular to each other
a
r
. b
r
= 0
( 2i

+ j

+ k

). ( i

2 j

+3 k

) = 0
(2) (1) + (2) + (1) (3) = 0
2 + 5 = 0 = 5/2
9. Let be the angle between vectors a
r
and b
r

We have, [ a
r
] = | b
r
| = 2 and a
r
. b
r
= 1
cos =
| | | |
.
b a
b a
r
r
r
r

cos =
2 2
1

=
2
1

cos = cos 2/3
= 2/3 [Q 0 ]
Hence, the angle between a
r
and b
r
is 2/3.
10. Let the direction ratios of the required line be a, b, c.
Since it is perpendicular to the two given lines.
Therefore,
a + 2b + 3c = 0 (i)
and 3a + 2b + 5c = 0 (ii)
solving (i) and (ii) by cross-multiplication, we get

4
a
=
14
b
=
8
c
or,
2
a
=
7
b
=
4
c
= k (say)
Thus, the required line passes through (1, 3, 2) and
has direction ratios proportional to 2, 7, 4. So its
equation is
2
1 + x
=
7
3

y
=
4
2 + z


Section B

11. C
1
C
1
C
2
C
3

=
y x x z x
q p p r p
b a a c a
+ +
+ +
+ +
2
2
2

= 2
y x x z x
q p p q p
b a a c a
+ +
+ +
+ +

C
2
C
2
C
1
, C
3
C
3
C
1

= 2
y z x
q r p
b c a

C
2
C
3

= (2)
z y x
r q p
c b a
= 2
z y x
r q p
c b a


12. A Getting a heart card
B Getting a queen card
Required probability P(A B)
= P(A) + P(B) P(A B)
=
52
13
+
52
4

13
1
=
13
4

OR
p = P (correct forcasting) = 1/3
q = P (two incorrect forecasting) = 2/3
n = 4
Let r be the number of correct forecast
P (at least three correct results)
= P ( r = 3) + P (r = 4)
=
4
C
3

4 4 4
4
4
3 3 4
3
1
3
2
C
3
1
3
2
|
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
|


[Q P (r) =
n
C
r
q
n r
P
r
]
=
4
C
1
4 0
0
4
3 1
3
1
3
2
3
1
3
2
|
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
|
C
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 93 JANUARY 2011
= 4
3
2

27
1
+1 1
81
1

=
9
1
81
9
81
1
81
8
= = +

13. Q f(0) = f(0
+
)
k =
0
lim
h

h
h h h
cos 1 2
1 4 9 36
+
+
.
(
(

+ +
+ +
h
h
cos 1 2
cos 1 2

=
0
lim
h
2
2
cos 1
) 1 9 )( 1 4 (
h
h
h
h h
|
.
|

\
|

. [ 2 + h cos 1+ ]
=
0
lim
h
|
.
|

\
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

|
|
.
|

\
|

2
cos 1
1 9 1 4
h
h
h h
h h
[ 2 + h cos 1+ ]
= ) 2 2 .(
) 2 / 1 (
) 9 ( ) 4 ( n n l l

k = 16 2 (ln2 ln3)

14.
dx
dy
= n [x +
2 2
a x + ]
n1

(
(

+
+
2 2
2
2
1
a x
x


dx
dy
= n [x +
2 2
x a + ]
n 1

2 2
2 2
] [
x a
x x a
+
+ +

=
2 2
2 2
] [
x a
x a x n
n
+
+ +


dx
dy
=
2 2
x a
ny
+


15. Put x = a cos
y = tan
1
+

cos 1
cos 1

y = tan
1
2 / cos 2
2 / sin 2
2
2


y = tan
1
|tan /2|
Q a < x < a a < a cos < a
1 < cos < 1
(0, )
y = tan
1
(tan /2)
y =
2
1
cos
1
(x/a)
dx
dy
=
2 2
2
1
x a


OR
Given : x = a ( sin ); y = a (1 cos)

d
dx
= a (1 cos );
d
dy
= a sin

) cos 1 (
sin
/
/

=
a
a
d dx
d dy
dx
dy
= cot
2

.
Now
dx
d
d
d
dx
y d
|
.
|

\
|

= .
2
cot
2
2

=
2
1
cosec
2

) cos 1 (
1
.
2

a

=
2
cos
4
1
4

ec
a
.
At =
2

; |
.
|

\
|
=
4
cos
4
1
4
2
2
ec
a
dx
y d
=
a
1
.

16.
dx
dy
= 3x
2
+ a

) 6 , 1 (
|
.
|

\
|
dx
dy
= 3 + a
slope of line = 1
a + 3 = 1 a = 2
From curve
y = x
3
2x + b
passes through (1, 6)
6 = 1 2 + b b = 5

17. one-one : Let x
1
, x
2
R {1}
f(x
1
) = f(x
2
)

1
1
1
+ x
x
=
1
2
2
+ x
x
x
1
x
2
+ x
1
= x
1
x
2
+ x
2

x
1
= x
2

one-one
onto :
Let y =
1 + x
x
x =
y
y
1

Q Range = R {1} = codomain
onto function

For f
1

Let y =
1 + x
x

x =
y
y
1
f
1
(x) =
x
x
1


18. = dx
x


2
2 cos 1

=

x 2 cos 2 1 (
4
1
+ cos
2
2x) dx
=

x 2 cos 2 1 (
4
1
+ )
2
4 cos 1 x +
dx
=

x 2 cos 4 2 (
8
1
+ 1 + cos 4x) dx
=

x 2 cos 4 3 (
8
1
+ cos 4x) dx
=
(

+
4
4 sin
2 sin 2 3
8
1 x
x x + C

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 94 JANUARY 2011
19. =

dx x x 2 cos 4 cos 2
2
1

=

+ dx x x ) 2 cos 6 (cos
2
1

=
)
`

+
2
2 sin
6
6 sin
2
1 x x
+ C

20. The equation of the family of circles of radius r is
(x a)
2
+ (y b)
2
= r
2

where a and b are parameters.
Since equation (i) contains two arbitrary constants,
we differentiate it two times w.r.t x and the
differential equation will be of second order.
Differentiating (i) w.r.t. x, we get
2(x a) + 2(y b)
dx
dy
= 0
(x a) + (y b)
dx
dy
= 0
Differentiating (ii) w.r.t. x, we get
1 + (y b)
2
2
dx
y d
+
2
|
.
|

\
|
dx
dy
= 0
From (iii), we have
y b =
2 2
2
/
) / ( 1
dx y d
dx dy +

Putting the value of (y b) in (ii), we obtain
x a =
2 2
2
/
1
dx y d
dx
dy
dx
dy

|
.
|

\
|
+

Substituting the values of (x a) and (y b) in (i), we get

2 2 2
2
2
2
) / (
1
dx y d
dx
dy
dx
dy
|
.
|

\
|

|
.
|

\
|
+
+
2 2 2
2
) / (
1
dx y d
dx
dy

|
.
|

\
|
+
= r
2


3
2
1

|
.
|

\
|
+
dx
dy
= r
2

2
2
2
|
|
.
|

\
|
dx
y d

This is the required differential equation.
OR
The given diff. eq. is
x . 0 2
3
= x y
dx
dy


2
2
1
x y
x dx
dy
= ...(1)
This is a linear diff. eq.
On comparing by, Q Py
dx
dy
= +
Here, P =
x
1
, Q = 2x
2

I.F. =
x
dx
x
Pdx
e e e
log
1

= =


=
1
log

x
e =
1
x
The reqd. sol. of eq. (1) is
y . x
1
=

c dx x x
1 2
. 2
=

+ c dx x 2 = x
2
+ c
y = x
3
+ cx.
21. We have,
a
r
. b
r
= a
r
. c
r
and a
r
0
r

a
r
. b
r
a
r
. c
r
= 0 and a
r
0
r

a
r
. ( b
r
c
r
) = 0 and a
r
0
r

b
r
c
r
= 0
r
or, a
r
( b
r
c
r
) Q [ a
r
0
r
|
b
r
=c
r
or , a
r
( b
r
c
r
) (i)
Again, a
r
b
r
= a
r
c
r
and a
r
0
r

a
r
b
r
a
r
c
r
=0
r
and a
r
0
r

a
r
( b
r
c
r
) = 0
r
and a
r
0
r

b
r
c
r
=0
r
or, a
r
|| ( b
r
c
r
) [Qa
r
0
r
]
b
r
=c
r
or, a
r
|| ( b
r
c
r
) (ii)
From (i) and (ii), it follows that b
r
= c
r
, because a
r

cannot be both parallel and perpendicular to ( b
r
c
r
)
OR
Q | |

a = | |

b = 1 (Given)
|

a +

b |
2
= |

a |
2
+ | |

b
2
+2

b a
= 1 + 1 + 2 | | | |

b a cos
= 2 + 2 (1) (1) cos
= 2 (1 + cos)
= 2 . 2 cos
2

2



2
| |

+ b a = 4 cos
2

2


| |

+ b a = 2 cos
2


cos
2

=
2
1
| |

+ b a Proved.

22. We have,

3
1 x
=
2
1 + y
=
5
1 z
= (say)
x = 3 +1, y = 2 1, z = 5 + 1
So, the coordinates of a general point on this line are
(3 +1, 2 1, 5 + 1)
The equation of the second line is

4
2 + x
=
3
1 y
=
2
1

+ z
= (say)
x = 4 2, y = 3 + 1, z = 21
So the coordinates of a general point on this line are
(4 2; 3 + 1, 2 1)
If the line intersect, then they have a common point.
So, for some values of and , we must have
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 95 JANUARY 2011
3 + 1 = 4 2, 21 = 3 + 1 and 5 + 1 = 2 1
3 4 = 3 (i)
2 3 = 2 (ii)
and, 5 + 2 = 2 (iii)
Solving (i) and (ii), we obtain = 17 and = 12.
These values of and do not satisfy the third
equation.
Hence, the given lines do not intersect.

Section C

23. Let I =

1
0
2 1
) 1 ( cot dx x x
[Q cot
1
x = tan
1
1/x]
Then, I =

|
.
|

\
|
+

1
0
2
1
1
1
tan dx
x x

I =

)
`

1
0
1
) 1 ( 1
1
tan dx
x x

I =

)
`

1
0
1
) 1 ( 1
) 1 (
tan dx
x x
x x

I =

+

1
0
1 1
)} 1 ( tan {tan dx x x
I =

+

1
0
1
0
1 1
) 1 ( tan tan dx x dx x

(
(

=

a a
dx x a f dx x f
0 0
) ( ) ( Q
I =

+

1
0
1
0
1 1
} ) 1 ( 1 { tan tan dx x dx x
I =


+
1
0
1
0
1 1
tan tan dx x dx x
I = 2

1
0
1
tan dx x I = 2
II I
dx x

1
0
1
1 . tan
I = 2 | |
1
0
1
tan x x

+
1
0
2
1 x
x
dx
I = 2 | |
1
0
1
tan x x

+
1
0
2
1
2
x
x
dx
I = 2 | |
1
0
1
tan x x

| |
1
0
2
) 1 log( x +
I = 2 |
.
|

\
|

0
4
(log2 log1)
I =
2

log 2
24. Let the two men are A and B
A A speaks truth
B B speaks truth
P(A) =
100
80
, P
) A (
=
100
20

P(B) =
100
90
, P ) B ( =
100
10

(A) required probability
= P(A). P ) B ( + P(B). P ) A ( =
50
13

(B) required probability
= P(A). P(B) + P ) A ( . P ) B ( =
50
37


25. Area =

4
2
dx y =

|
.
|

\
| +
4
2
2
8
dx
x

=
2
1

+
4
2
4
2
4 dx dx x

B
y
(0, 4)
(8, 0)
x
2y = x + 8
A x = 4 x = 2 O
|

=
2
1
4
2
2
2
x
(
(

+ 4
4
2
] x [
=
2
1
(

+
2
4
2
16
+ 4[4 2]
=
2
1
(6) + 4(2)
= 8 3
= 5 sq. units.
26. Let Q be the image of the point P( i

+ 3 j

+ 4 k

) in
the plane r
r
. (2 i

+ k

) + 3 = 0. Then, PQ is
normal to the plane. Since PQ passes through P and
is normal to the given plane, therefore equation of
line PQ is
r
r
= ( i

+ 3 j

+ 4 k

) + (2i

+ k

)
Since Q lies on line PQ, so let the position vector of
Q be ( i

+3 j

+ 4 k

) + (2i

+ k

)
= (1 + 2) i

+ (3 ) j

+ (4+ ) k


Since R is the mid-point of PQ. Therefore, position
vector of R is

2
]

[ ]

) 4 (

) 3 (

) 2 1 [( k j i k j i + + + + + + +

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 96 JANUARY 2011
= ( +1) i

+ |
.
|

\
|

2
3 j

+ |
.
|

\
|
+
2
4 k


Since R lies on the plane r
r
. (2i

+ k

)+ 3 = 0

)
`

|
.
|

\
|
+ + |
.
|

\
|
+ + k j i

2
4

2
3

) 1 ( . (2i

+ k

) + 3
= 0
2 + 2 3 +
2

+ 4 +
2

+ 3 = 0
= 2


P
R
Q
( i

+ 3
j

+ 4 k

)

Thus, the position vector of Q is
( i

+3 j

+4 k

) 2 (2i

+ k

) = 3 i

+ 5 j

+2 k



27. Suppose the dealer buys x fans and y sewing
machines. Since the dealer has space for at most 20
items. Therefore,
x + y 20
A fan costs Rs.360 and a sewing machine costs
Rs.240. Therefore, total cost of x fans and y sewing
machines is Rs.(360x +240y). But the dealer has only
Rs.5760 to invest . Therefore,
360x + 240y 5760
Since the dealer can sell all the items that he can buy
and the profit on a fan is of Rs.22 and on a sewing
machine the profit is of Rs.18. Therefore, total profit
on selling x fans.
Let Z denote the total profit. Then, Z = 22x + 18y.
Clearly x, y 0
Thus, the mathematical formulation of the given
problem is
Maximize Z = 22x + 18y
S. t. x + y 20
360 x + 240y 5760
and x 0, y 0
To solve this LPP graphically, we first convert the
inequations into equations and draw the
corresponding lines. The feasible region of the LPP is
shaded in fig. The corner points of the feasible region
OA
2
PB
1
are O(0, 0), A
2
(16, 0), P(8,12) and
B
1
(0, 20).
These points have been obtained by solving the
corresponding intersecting lines, simultaneously.
(0, 0)
A2 (16, 0)
360x + 240y = 5760
X
B1(0,20)
B2 (0,24)
y
P (8,12)
A1 (20, 0)
x + y = 20

The values of the objective function Z at corner
points of the feasible region are given in the
following table.

Points (x, y) Value of the objective function
Z = 22x + 18y
O (0, 0) Z= 22 0 + 18 0 = 0
A
2
(16, 0) Z = 2216 + 18 0 = 352
P (8, 12) Z = 22 8 + 18 12 = 392
B
1
(0, 20) Z = 22 0 + 20 18 = 360

Clearly, Z is maximum at x = 8 and y = 12. The
maximum value of Z is 392.
Hence, the dealer should purchase 8 fans and 12
sewing machines to obtain the maximum profit under
given conditions.

28. A
11
=
1 2
1 0

= 2; A
12
=
1 0
1 2

= 2;
A
13
=
2 0
0 2

= 4
A
21
=
1 2
1 1

= 1; A
22
=
1 0
1 2

= 2;
A
23
=
2 0
1 2

= 4
A
31
=
1 0
1 1
= 1; A
32
=
1 2
1 2
= 0;
A
33
=
0 2
1 2
= 2
adj A =

(
(
(

2 0 1
4 2 1
4 2 2
=
(
(
(

2 4 4
0 2 2
1 1 2


|A| = 2(2) + (1) (2) + 1(4) = 4 + 2 4 = 2 0

A
1
=
| A |
A adj
=
2
1
(
(
(

2 4 4
0 2 2
1 1 2


The given system of equations can be written
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 97 JANUARY 2011
AX = B where X =
(
(
(

z
y
x
, B =
(
(
(

1
5
3

X = A
1
B

(
(
(

z
y
x
=
2
1
(
(
(

2 4 4
0 2 2
1 1 2

(
(
(

1
5
3

=
2
1
(
(
(

+
2 20 12
10 6
1 5 6
=
2
1
(
(
(

6
4
2
=
(
(
(

3
2
1

x = 1, y = 2, z = 3
OR
A
11
=
4 3
2 3

= 12 + 6 = 6;
A
12
=
4 3
2 2

= 14
A
13
=
3 3
3 2

= 6 9 = 15;
A
21
=
4 3
3 2

= (8 9) = 17
A
22
=
4 3
3 1

= 4 + 9 = 5;
A
23
=
3 3
2 1

= (3 6) = 9
A
31
=
2 3
3 2
= 4 + 9 = 13;
A
32
=
2 2
3 1
= (2 + 6) = 8
A
33
=
3 2
2 1
= 3 4 = 1
adj A =

(
(
(



1 8 13
9 5 17
15 14 6
=
(
(
(

1 9 15
8 5 14
13 17 6


|A| = 1 (6) + 2(14) + (3) (15)
= 6 + 28 + 45 = 67

A
1
=
| A |
A adj
=
67
1
(
(
(

1 9 15
8 5 14
13 17 6

The given system of equations can be written as
AX = B where X =
(
(
(

z
y
x
, B =
(
(
(

11
2
4
X = A
1
B


(
(
(

z
y
x
=
67
1
(
(
(

1 9 15
8 5 14
13 17 6
(
(
(

11
2
4


=
67
1
(
(
(

+
+
+ +
11 18 60
88 10 54
143 34 24
=
67
1
(
(
(

67
134
201
=
(
(
(

1
2
3


Hence x = 3, y = 2, z = 1

29. 1
st
Part:
f (x) = cos x sin x = 0 tan x = 1 x = /4
f (x) = sin x cos x
f (x)|
x = /4
= 1/ 2 1/ 2 = 2 < 0
Local maxima at x = /4
OR
2
nd
Part:
Let x > 0, y > 0
x + y = 14 (1)
Let S = x
2
+ y
2

S = x
2
+ (14 x)
2


dx
dS
= 2x + 2(14 x) (1) = 0 x = 7; y = 7

2
2
dx
S d
= 2 + 2 = 4 > 0 is minimum x = 7 = y



Cartoon Law of Physics

As speed increases, objects can be in several places
at once.
This is particularly true of tooth-and-claw fights, in
which a character's head may be glimpsed emerging
from the cloud of altercation at several places
simultaneously. This effect is common as well
among bodies that are spinning or being throttled.
A `wacky' character has the option of self-
replication only at manic high speeds and may
ricochet off walls to achieve the velocity required.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 98 JANUARY 2011
XtraEdge Test Series
ANSWER KEY
PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A C B B B B B B A D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans D D B B B D D A B

20 A S B R C Q D P
21 A P,Q,R B S C R,S D P,Q
Column
Matching
22 A Q B P C R,S D P

CHEMISTRY
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A B A B C A C B A C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A A D C A B D B C

20 A R B P C Q D R
21 A Q,R,S B Q,R,S C R,S D P,S
Column
Matching
22 A Q,R,S B Q,R,S C P,Q,R D Q,R,S

MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans D B D A B B A C C D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans B C D B A B C D B

20 A Q B P C R D S
21 A R B P C Q D S
Column
Matching
22 A R B Q C P D S



PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A A C D A D A B B D
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A A D D C C B C A

20 A R B P C Q D S
21 A R B P C Q D S
Column
Matching
22 A Q,R B P,Q C Q D P

CHEMISTRY
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans D B B B D A D B A A
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A B B C B A A C A

20 A P,R B P,R C Q D S
21 A S B P,Q C R D S
Column
Matching
22 A R B P C S D Q

MATHEMATICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans A A C B C A B C B C
Ques 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans A A C A C B A B A

20 A P B Q C S D R
21 A Q B S C R D P
Column
Matching
22 A Q B P C S D R
IIT- JEE 2011 (January issue)
IIT- JEE 2012 (January issue)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 99 JANUARY 2011



'XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.


"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.



Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of IIT JEE.


Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.


Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills


Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.


Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians


Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/Contests problems and Challenging Questions.

SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4
th
Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005

I wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine XtraEdge for IIT-JEE

Half Yearly Subscription (Rs. 100/-)

One Year subscription (Rs. 200/-)

Two year Subscription (Rs. 400/-)
I am paying R. .through
Money Order (M.O)
Bank Demand Draft of No..Bank..Dated
(Note: Demand Draft should be in favour of "Career Point Infosystems Ltd" payable at Kota.)

Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Father's Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________________________________
________________________City_____________________________State__________________________
PIN_________________________________________Ph with STD Code __________________________
Class Studying in ________________E-Mail: ________________________________________________
From months: ____________________to ________________________________________________


Subscription Offer for Students
Special
Offer
C
C
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 100 JANUARY 2011

Você também pode gostar